ControlSystem E

Perfection in Automation
B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Version: Model No.: 0111 MASYS2KAT-E
The software names, hardware names and trademarks used in this document are registered by the respective companies. 2001 BERNECKER + RAINER Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H.
Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family
Chapter 2 B&R SYSTEM 2003
Chapter 5 B&R Logic Scanner
Chapter 6 Accessories
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family ........................................................... 13

1. Modular Construction ................................................................................................................................. 1.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 1.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 1.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 2. System and I/O Bus ................................................................................................................................... 2.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 2.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 2.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 3. Supply Voltage ........................................................................................................................................... 3.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 and B&R SYSTEM 2005 ..................................................................................... 3.2 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 4. Terminal Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 4.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 4.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 4.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 5. Program Memory Modules ........................................................................................................................ 5.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 5.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 5.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 6. Local Expansion (Expansion I/O) .............................................................................................................. 6.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 6.2 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 6.3 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 6.4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 7. Remote Expansion (Remote I/O) ............................................................................................................... 7.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 7.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 7.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 8. Combination Possibilities using Local Expansions .................................................................................... 8.1 B&R 2005 on B&R 2010 ....................................................................................................................... 8.2 B&R 2010 on B&R 2005 ....................................................................................................................... 9. Combination Possibilities using Remote Expansions ................................................................................ 9.1 B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 .................................................................................................. 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 25 26 26 26
Chapter 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 ..................................................................................... 27

1. Module Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID ..................................................................................... 1.2 Sorted according to Group ................................................................................................................... 2. General Information ................................................................................................................................... 2.1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................... 2.2 Mounting Rail ........................................................................................................................................ 2.3 Module Rack ......................................................................................................................................... 2.4 Modules ................................................................................................................................................ 2.5 Installation Dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 2.6 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 2.7 Terminal Block ...................................................................................................................................... 2.8 Module Slot Rules ................................................................................................................................ 2.9 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity ............................................................................. 3. Module Rack .............................................................................................................................................. 3.1 BP70x ................................................................................................................................................... 4. Bus Controller Modules ............................................................................................................................. 4.1 CAN Bus Controller .............................................................................................................................. 4.2 Remote I/O Bus Controller ................................................................................................................... 4.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 4.4 EX270 ................................................................................................................................................... 4.5 EX470 / EX770 ..................................................................................................................................... 4.6 EX477 / EX777 ..................................................................................................................................... 5. CPUs .........................................................................................................................................................
27 27 29 32 32 32 32 34 37 39 42 43 45 46 46 48 48 48 48 49 50 52 54
5
Table of Contents 5.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 54 5.2 RS232 Interface .................................................................................................................................... 54 5.3 CAN Interface ....................................................................................................................................... 54 5.4 Local I/O Expansion using B&R 2003 Modules .................................................................................... 54 5.5 Local I/O on the CPU (4 slots) .............................................................................................................. 54 5.6 Application Examples ........................................................................................................................... 54 5.7 Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 55 5.8 Backup Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 55 5.9 Programming the FlashPROM ............................................................................................................. 55 5.10 Legend Sheets ................................................................................................................................... 55 5.11 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 55 5.12 CP430 / CP47x / CP77x ..................................................................................................................... 56 5.13 CP476 ................................................................................................................................................. 60 6. Program Memory Modules ........................................................................................................................ 63 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 63 6.2 ME770 .................................................................................................................................................. 64 7. Analog Interface (AF) Module .................................................................................................................... 65 7.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 65 7.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 65 7.3 Module Overview .................................................................................................................................. 65 7.4 AF101 ................................................................................................................................................... 67 8. Digital Input Modules ................................................................................................................................. 68 8.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 68 8.2 Input Filter ............................................................................................................................................. 68 8.3 Screw-in Module Overview ................................................................................................................... 68 8.4 I/O Module Overview ............................................................................................................................ 69 8.5 DI135 .................................................................................................................................................... 70 8.6 DI138 .................................................................................................................................................... 72 8.7 DI140 .................................................................................................................................................... 74 8.8 DI435 .................................................................................................................................................... 76 8.9 DI439.7 ................................................................................................................................................. 77 8.10 DI439.72 ............................................................................................................................................. 79 8.11 DI645 .................................................................................................................................................. 81 9. Digital Output Modules .............................................................................................................................. 82 9.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 82 9.2 Protective Circuit .................................................................................................................................. 82 9.3 Screw-in Module Overview ................................................................................................................... 82 9.4 I/O Module Overview ............................................................................................................................ 82 9.5 DO135 .................................................................................................................................................. 83 9.6 DO138 .................................................................................................................................................. 85 9.7 DO164 .................................................................................................................................................. 87 9.8 DO435 .................................................................................................................................................. 89 9.9 DO720 .................................................................................................................................................. 91 9.10 DO721 ................................................................................................................................................ 93 9.11 DO722 ................................................................................................................................................ 95 10. Digital Mixed Modules .............................................................................................................................. 97 10.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 97 10.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 97 10.3 DM435 ................................................................................................................................................ 98 10.4 DM438 .............................................................................................................................................. 100 10.5 DM465 .............................................................................................................................................. 102 11. Analog Input Modules ............................................................................................................................ 104 11.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 104 11.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 104 11.3 AI261 ................................................................................................................................................ 105 11.4 AI294 ................................................................................................................................................ 107 11.5 AI351 ................................................................................................................................................ 108 11.6 AI354 ................................................................................................................................................ 109 11.7 AI774 ................................................................................................................................................ 110
Table of Contents 12. Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 12.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 12.2 AO352 .............................................................................................................................................. 13. Temperature Modules ............................................................................................................................ 13.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 13.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 13.3 AT324 ............................................................................................................................................... 13.4 AT352 ............................................................................................................................................... 13.5 AT664 ............................................................................................................................................... 14. Other Modules ....................................................................................................................................... 14.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 14.2 Combination Modules ....................................................................................................................... 14.3 B&R 2003 Expansions for CP476 .................................................................................................... 14.4 Motor Modules .................................................................................................................................. 14.5 CM211 .............................................................................................................................................. 14.6 CM411 .............................................................................................................................................. 14.7 ME010 .............................................................................................................................................. 14.8 ME020 .............................................................................................................................................. 14.9 MM424 .............................................................................................................................................. 14.10 MM432 ............................................................................................................................................ 15. Communication Modules ....................................................................................................................... 15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 15.2 IF311 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.3 IF321 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.4 IF361 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.5 IF371 ................................................................................................................................................ 16. Counter and Positioning Modules .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 16.2 NC161 .............................................................................................................................................. 17. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 17.2 AC010 / AC020 ................................................................................................................................. 17.3 AC011 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.4 TB722 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.5 TB733 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.6 TB736 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.7 TB754 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.8 TB772 ............................................................................................................................................... 18. Manuals ................................................................................................................................................. 18.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 116 117 119 119 119 119 119 120 123 125 127 129 131 133 133 134 135 136 137 138 138 139 141 141 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 147 147
Chapter 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................................................... 149

1. Module Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID ................................................................................. 1.2 Sorted according to Group ................................................................................................................. 2. General Information ................................................................................................................................. 2.1 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................... 2.2 Basic Module Construction ................................................................................................................. 2.3 Module Rack ....................................................................................................................................... 2.4 Mounting Rail ...................................................................................................................................... 2.5 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 2.6 Terminal Block TB170 ........................................................................................................................ 2.7 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity ........................................................................... 3. Module Rack ............................................................................................................................................ 3.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 3.2 BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP155 ....................................................................................................... 4. Power Supply Modules ............................................................................................................................ 4.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 4.2 Safety Features ..................................................................................................................................
149 149 151 154 154 154 155 155 156 158 159 159 159 160 161 161 161
7
Table of Contents 4.3 Special Functions ............................................................................................................................... 4.4 Expansion Slot .................................................................................................................................... 4.5 Expansion Slave (local expansion) ..................................................................................................... 4.6 Remote Slave (remote expansion) ..................................................................................................... 4.7 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 4.8 PS465 / PS477 ................................................................................................................................... 4.9 PS692 / PS694 ................................................................................................................................... 4.10 PS792 / PS794 ................................................................................................................................. 5. Bus Controller Modules ........................................................................................................................... 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 5.2 EX150 ................................................................................................................................................. 5.3 EX250 ................................................................................................................................................. 5.4 EX350 ................................................................................................................................................. 6. CPUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1 Programming ...................................................................................................................................... 6.2 Buffering ............................................................................................................................................. 6.3 Programming the FlashPROM ........................................................................................................... 6.4 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 6.5 CP260 ................................................................................................................................................. 6.6 IF260 .................................................................................................................................................. 6.7 IP161 .................................................................................................................................................. 6.8 XP152 ................................................................................................................................................. 7. Programmable Modules ........................................................................................................................... 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 7.2 DM455 ................................................................................................................................................ 8. Digital Input Modules ............................................................................................................................... 8.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 8.2 Input Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 8.3 Sink/Source Connections ................................................................................................................... 8.4 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 8.5 DI450 .................................................................................................................................................. 8.6 DI475 / DI476 ..................................................................................................................................... 8.7 DI477 .................................................................................................................................................. 8.8 DI486 .................................................................................................................................................. 8.9 DI695 .................................................................................................................................................. 9. Digital Output Modules ............................................................................................................................ 9.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 9.2 Protective Circuit ................................................................................................................................ 9.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 9.4 DO479 / DO480 .................................................................................................................................. 9.5 DO650 / DO750 .................................................................................................................................. 9.6 DO690 ................................................................................................................................................ 9.7 DO760 ................................................................................................................................................ 10. Digital Mixed Modules ............................................................................................................................ 10.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 10.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 10.3 DM476 .............................................................................................................................................. 11. Analog Input Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 11.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 11.3 AI350 / AI375 / AI775 ....................................................................................................................... 12. Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 12.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 12.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 12.3 AO350 / AO775 ................................................................................................................................ 13. Analog Mixed Modules .......................................................................................................................... 13.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 13.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 13.3 AM050 .............................................................................................................................................. 161 161 161 161 162 163 165 167 169 169 169 171 173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 179 182 184 184 185 187 187 187 188 188 189 191 193 194 195 196 196 196 196 197 199 201 203 205 205 205 206 208 208 208 209 210 210 210 211 212 212 212 213
Table of Contents 13.4 AM051 .............................................................................................................................................. 13.5 AM055 .............................................................................................................................................. 13.6 AM374 .............................................................................................................................................. 14. Temperature Modules ............................................................................................................................ 14.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 14.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 14.3 AT350 / AT450 ................................................................................................................................. 14.4 AT660 ............................................................................................................................................... 15. Communication Modules ....................................................................................................................... 15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 15.2 IF050 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.3 IF060 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.4 IF613 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.5 IF621 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.6 IF622 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.7 IF661 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.8 IF671 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.9 IF672 ................................................................................................................................................ 15.10 IF681.95 ......................................................................................................................................... 15.11 IF681.96 ......................................................................................................................................... 15.12 NW150 ............................................................................................................................................ 16. Counter and Positioning Modules .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 16.2 NC150 .............................................................................................................................................. 16.3 NC154 .............................................................................................................................................. 16.4 NC157 .............................................................................................................................................. 17. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 17.2 AC240 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.3 Cable NC154 - PC ............................................................................................................................ 17.4 BM150 .............................................................................................................................................. 17.5 TB162 ............................................................................................................................................... 17.6 TB170 ............................................................................................................................................... 18. Manuals ................................................................................................................................................. 18.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 215 217 219 221 221 221 222 224 226 226 227 229 230 231 233 235 236 238 240 242 244 245 245 246 248 252 255 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 261
Chapter 4: B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................................................... 263

1. Module Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID ................................................................................. 1.2 Sorted according to Group ................................................................................................................. 2. General Information ................................................................................................................................. 2.1 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................... 2.2 Basic Module Construction ................................................................................................................. 2.3 Differences between System and I/O Modules .................................................................................. 2.4 Module Rack ....................................................................................................................................... 2.5 Mounting Rail ...................................................................................................................................... 2.6 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 2.7 Terminal Block TB120 / TB140 ........................................................................................................... 2.8 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity ........................................................................... 3. Module Rack ............................................................................................................................................ 3.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 3.2 Configuration of the Various Module Racks ....................................................................................... 3.3 BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300 .............................................................. 4. Power Supply Modules ............................................................................................................................ 4.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 4.2 Safety Features .................................................................................................................................. 4.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 4.4 Power Supply Module Location .......................................................................................................... 4.5 PS425 .................................................................................................................................................
263 263 264 267 267 267 268 269 270 270 273 274 275 275 276 278 279 279 279 279 279 282
9
Table of Contents 4.6 PS740 ................................................................................................................................................. 5. Bus Controller Modules ........................................................................................................................... 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 5.2 EX100 / EX200 ................................................................................................................................... 5.3 EX301 / EX302 ................................................................................................................................... 6. CPUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 6.2 Status Area ......................................................................................................................................... 6.3 Connection area ................................................................................................................................. 6.4 Safety Features .................................................................................................................................. 6.5 Programming ...................................................................................................................................... 6.6 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 6.7 CP100 / CP104 / CP200 / CP210 ....................................................................................................... 7. Programmable Modules ........................................................................................................................... 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 7.2 DS100 ................................................................................................................................................. 7.3 DS101 ................................................................................................................................................. 7.4 MP100 ................................................................................................................................................ 8. Program Memory Modules ...................................................................................................................... 8.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 8.2 Buffering the RAM .............................................................................................................................. 8.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 8.4 ME910 / ME913 / ME915 ................................................................................................................... 9. Digital Input Modules ............................................................................................................................... 9.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 9.2 Input Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 9.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 9.4 Sink/Source Connections ................................................................................................................... 9.5 DI400 .................................................................................................................................................. 9.6 DI425 / DI426 ..................................................................................................................................... 9.7 DI725 .................................................................................................................................................. 9.8 DI825 .................................................................................................................................................. 10. Digital Output Modules .......................................................................................................................... 10.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 10.2 Protective circuit ............................................................................................................................... 10.3 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 10.4 DO428 / DO430 ................................................................................................................................ 10.5 DO600 / DO700 ................................................................................................................................ 10.6 DO710 .............................................................................................................................................. 11. Analog Input Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 11.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 11.3 AI300 / AI700 .................................................................................................................................... 11.4 AI730 ................................................................................................................................................ 12. Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 12.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 12.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 12.3 AO300 / AO725 / AO900 .................................................................................................................. 13. Temperature Modules ............................................................................................................................ 13.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 13.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 13.3 AT300 ............................................................................................................................................... 13.4 AT610 ............................................................................................................................................... 14. Other Modules ....................................................................................................................................... 14.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 14.2 UM900 .............................................................................................................................................. 15. Communication Modules ....................................................................................................................... 15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 15.2 IF100 / IF101 .................................................................................................................................... 283 285 285 286 288 289 289 289 289 290 290 290 291 293 293 294 297 300 302 302 302 302 303 304 304 304 304 305 306 308 309 310 312 312 312 312 313 315 317 319 319 319 320 321 322 322 322 323 324 324 324 325 326 328 328 329 331 331 332
10
Table of Contents 15.3 NW100 .............................................................................................................................................. 16. Counter and Positioning Modules .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 16.2 NC303 .............................................................................................................................................. 17. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 17.2 BM100 .............................................................................................................................................. 17.3 TB120 / TB140 ................................................................................................................................. 18. Manuals ................................................................................................................................................. 18.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 334 335 335 336 339 339 340 341 342 342
Chapter 5: B&R Logic Scanner .................................................................................. 343

1. Module Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 2. General Information ................................................................................................................................. 2.1 B&R PLC Operating System .............................................................................................................. 3. CPUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3.2 LS251 ................................................................................................................................................. 4. Communication Modules ......................................................................................................................... 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 4.2 LS071 ................................................................................................................................................. 4.3 LS079 ................................................................................................................................................. 5. Manuals ................................................................................................................................................... 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 343 344 344 345 345 346 349 349 350 352 354 354
Chapter 6: Accessories ............................................................................................... 355

1. Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 2. General Accessories ................................................................................................................................ 2.1 AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V ................................................................................................................. 2.2 AC410 Interface Converter ................................................................................................................. 2.3 AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x ............................................................................................................. 2.4 AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x ............................................................................................................. 2.5 AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active .............................................................................................. 2.6 RS485 Bus Connector ........................................................................................................................ 2.7 AC911 Bus Connector, CAN .............................................................................................................. 2.8 TB124 24 Pin Terminal Block ............................................................................................................. 2.9 TB710 10 Pin Terminal Block ............................................................................................................. 2.10 TB712 12 Pin Terminal Block ........................................................................................................... 2.11 TB718 18 Pin Terminal Block ........................................................................................................... 2.12 INT1 Interface Converter .................................................................................................................. 355 356 356 356 357 358 359 359 360 361 362 363 364 365
Chapter 7: Standards and Certifications ................................................................... 367

1. Standards and Limits Used ...................................................................................................................... 367 1.1 Limits ......................................................................................................................................... 367 1.2 International Standards ...................................................................................................................... 368
11
Table of Contents
12
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Modular Construction
1. Modular Construction
1.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003
Controller and I/O modules are hung in the module rack and screwed to a threaded strip which is inserted in the aluminum frame. The electrical connection between the modules is achieved by pushing the modules together (connectors integrated in the modules). The module rack is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.
Diagram 1: Modular construction of B&R SYSTEM 2003
1.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

The B&R SYSTEM 2005 consists of encased modules. The modules (except the power supply and the CPU) can be inserted in any order on a backplane. The backplane is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet. Both the bus system and the supply lines are on the backplane. Backplanes are available in different lengths (6, 9, 12, 15 slots).
13
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family System and I/O Bus 1.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010
The B&R SYSTEM 2010 consists of encased modules, which are attached to a modular backplane. The backplane is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.
2. System and I/O Bus

2.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003
The B&R SYSTEM 2003 has an I/O bus. The electrical connection between the modules is achieved by pushing the modules together (connectors integrated in the modules). Standard field bus technology Compact design Integrated terminals 2 or 3 line connections No extra terminals needed
Diagram 4: System and I/O Bus B&R SYSTEM 2003
14
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family System and I/O Bus 2.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005
There is a combined I/O and system bus on every B&R SYSTEM 2005 backplane. Therefore system and I/O modules can be inserted on the main backplane. The backplane where the CPU is installed is the main backplane. Combined system and I/O bus Only one backplane type is required for main and expansion backplanes (eases stock management) Secure protocol for I/O data transfer (expansion) Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family
2.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

One characteristic of the B&R SYSTEM 2010 is the separation of the bus system into a system and I/O bus. I/O and power supply modules are connected to the I/O bus and system modules (e.g. network modules, multiprocessors) are connected to the system bus. Separate System and I/O Bus Different backplane modules are required for system and I/O bus Secure protocol for I/O data transfer High data throughput because the system and I/O bus do not influence each other: The I/O bus manages the mostly constant, deterministic and cyclic data for classic PLC modules (e.g. digital or analog I/O modules). The system bus sporadically handles large amounts of data, which does not affect data flow on the I/O bus because of the separated bus system.
15
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Supply Voltage
3. Supply Voltage
3.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 and B&R SYSTEM 2005
The systems have a central supply. The supply voltage is either 24 VDC 25 % or 90 to 250 VAC.
3.2 B&R SYSTEM 2010

The B&R SYSTEM 2010 uses a decentralized supply voltage. Any number of power supply modules can be installed on the I/O bus to provide power to the I/O and system modules via the bus system. It is possible to integrate a redundant supply voltage into the system by installing more power supplies than are actually needed. This ensures that the PLC will always be supplied with power, even if one of the power supply modules drops out.
16
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Terminal Blocks
4. Terminal Blocks
4.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003
B&R 2003 modules use a large number of terminal blocks to make connections. The construction of the terminal blocks has the following advantages for the PLC user: Terminal blocks can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module or directly on the terminal blocks. Most terminal blocks are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps. Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family
Screw clamp
Cage clamp
Diagram 7: Terminal blocks B&R SYSTEM 2003
4.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

B&R SYSTEM 2005 modules are connected using the a single row terminal block. The construction of the terminal block has the following advantages for the PLC user: The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module. The terminal blocks are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps.
Screw clamp
Cage clamp
4.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

B&R SYSTEM 2010 modules are connected with easy to use 20 pin terminal blocks (TB120) or 40 pin terminal blocks (TB140).
TB120
TB140
17
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Program Memory Modules
5. Program Memory Modules

5.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003
5.1.1 CPU - PLC 2003 When using a B&R CPU, application programs and the operating system are stored in the CPU. 5.1.2 Remote Slaves When used as a remote I/O slave, the application programs are stored in the remote master (e.g. EX150) . The operating system is programmed in the remote I/O bus controller. 5.1.3 CAN Slaves When used as a CAN slave, the application programs are stored in the CAN master (e.g. XP152). The operating system is programmed in the CAN bus controller. Configuration data can be placed in configuration memory (inserted from the front). The CAN bus controller EX270 is equipped with an internal S-EEPROM. Operating system parameters can be stored in this S-EEPROM.
5.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPUs have the memory for application programs and the operating system integrated in the module.
5.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

All the software necessary for the B&R SYSTEM 2010 PLC (operating system, application programs) is stored in application memory. The application memory is inserted into the front of a processor module.
Diagram 10: Program memory module B&R SYSTEM 2010
18
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)
6. Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)

6.1 General Information
To save space, the B&R SYSTEM 2005 and 2010 can be separated into several bus segments. With local expansion, the expansion rack is attached near the main rack (usually in the same control cabinet). Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family
6.2 B&R SYSTEM 2003

Local I/O bus expansion is not possible with this system.
6.3 B&R SYSTEM 2005

The main rack contains the CPU. Expansion racks do not have CPUs, but they have their own power supply modules. A CPU with expansion master is required in the main rack, and a power supply module with expansion slave is required in the expansion rack. Up to four expansion slaves can be operated from by expansion master.
Diagram 11: B&R SYSTEM 2005 local expansion (expansion I/O)
19
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Local Expansion (Expansion I/O) 6.4 B&R SYSTEM 2010
Up to 99 modules (I/O modules, power supply modules, expansion modules) can be addressed on the I/O bus of a B&R 2010 system. This I/O bus can be split up into several bus segments using expansion modules. Therefore, the I/O modules are not restricted by the size and shape of the control cabinet. You can always use the maximum number of slots for I/O modules without worrying about the space required (except for the slots for the expansion master, expansion slave and power supply modules). The following should be noted when splitting up the local I/O bus into several sections: An expansion master can be operated on any bus segment on level 1 or 2 (see diagram) in any slot on the I/O bus. The expansion slave is always located in the far left slot of a bus segment. A separate backplane module (BP202) is required for the expansion slave.
Diagram 12: B&R SYSTEM 2010 local expansion (expansion I/O)
20
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Remote Expansion (Remote I/O)
7. Remote Expansion (Remote I/O)

Expansion racks can be up to 1200 meters from the main rack when using remote expansion (remote I/O). With repeaters, the network can be extended even further. A remote I/O master module is required in the main rack, and a remote I/O slave module is required in the expansion rack. Up to 31 remote I/O slaves can be operated by one remote I/O master without a repeater, or up to 126 remote I/O slaves with a repeater. Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family
7.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003

Two types of expansion are possible: Remote I/O bus CAN field bus
7.1.1 Remote I/O Bus The remote master is a B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner. To be able to use a B&R SYSTEM 2003 as a slave in a remote I/O network, a remote I/O bus controller EX477 or EX777 is required.
Diagram 13: Remote expansion on remote I/O bus
21
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Remote Expansion (Remote I/O)

7.1.2 CAN Field Bus The CAN master is a B&R SYSTEM 2003, B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner. To add a B&R SYSTEM 2003 to a CAN network, a EX270, EX470 or EX770 CAN bus controller is required.
Diagram 14: Remote expansion (remote I/O) on CAN field bus
22
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Remote Expansion (Remote I/O) 7.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005
Diagram 15: B&R SYSTEM 2005
23
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Remote Expansion (Remote I/O) 7.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010
Each remote I/O slave can address up to a maximum of 99 modules. Separation into several bus segments is also possible since each remote I/O unit has its own I/O bus.
Diagram 16: B&R SYSTEM 2010
24
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Combination Possibilities using Local Expansions
8. Combination Possibilities using Local Expansions

8.1 B&R 2005 on B&R 2010
A B&R 2005 expansion backplane is coupled to a B&R 2010 expansion master using a power supply with expansion slave. The entire configuration can have a maximum of four B&R 2005 expansion backplanes. Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family
Diagram 17: B&R SYSTEM 2005 on 2010
25
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Combination Possibilities using Remote Expansions 8.2 B&R 2010 on B&R 2005
A 2010 I/O bus is coupled to the 2005 using an expansion slave. A maximum of twenty 2010 I/O modules can be connected in this way.
Diagram 18: B&R SYSTEM 2010 on 2005
9. Combination Possibilities using Remote Expansions

9.1 B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010
Up to 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master (B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner) and the B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 systems can be combined as desired.
Slave Type 2010 2005 2003 Number of Slots Max. 99 (daisy chained) Max. 13 Max. 8
Table 1: Remote slave slots
26
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Module Overview
1. Module Overview
1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID
Product ID ----AC010 AC011 AC020 AF101 AI261 AI294 AI351 Description B&R 2003 Users Manual, German B&R 2003 Users Manual, English 5 bus covers 5 stress relief attachments including mounting material 1 bus cover Adapter module AF101 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge, 24 bit resolution 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge, 13 bit resolution 1 input 10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution + sign -0.3 W -0.6 W -0.5 W U/I: -0.3 W Pot.: -0,7 W -0.5 W -0.4 W -1.2 W -0.1 W -0.4 W -0.4 W Power Model No. MASYS22003-0 MASYS22003-E 7AC010.9 7AC011.9 7AC020.9 7AF101.7 7AI261.7 7AI294.7 7AI351.70 Page 147 147 141 142 141 67 105 107 108
AI354 AI774 AO352 AT324 AT352 AT664 BP701.1 BP702 BP702.1 BP703 BP704 BP705 BP706 BP707 BP708 BP709 BP710 CM211
4 inputs 10 V, 12 bit resolution + sign 4 inputs 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution 2 outputs 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 4 inputs for temperature sensors (PT100 / PT1000 / KTY10-6 / KTY84-130) 2 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) 4 inputs for thermocouples Module rack, for 1 module, incl. right side section Module rack, for 2 modules Module rack, for 2 modules, incl. right side section Module rack, for 3 modules Module rack, for 4 modules Module rack, for 5 modules Module rack, for 6 modules Module rack, for 7 modules Module rack, for 8 modules Module rack, for 9 modules Module rack, for 10 modules 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 20 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 2 analog inputs 10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution, 2 analog outputs 10 V, 12 bit resolution 3 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 50 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 2 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 3 analog inputs 10 V, 16 bit resolution, 3 analog outputs 10 V, 16 bit resolution CPU, 24 VDC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 24 VDC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 750 KByte SRAM, 1.5 MByte FlashPROM, system bus for expansion modules CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM 4 Inputs, 24 VDC, event counter mode: 100 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC 50 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC
7AI354.70 7AI774.70 7AO352.70 7AT324.70 7AT352.70 7AT664.70 7BP701.1 7BP702.0 7BP702.1 7BP703.0 7BP704.0 7BP705.0 7BP706.0 7BP707.0 7BP708.0 7BP709.0 7BP710.0
109 110 112 114 116 117 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 120
-1.5 W
7CM211.7
CM411
-2.4 W
7CM411.70-1
123
CP430 CP470 CP474 CP476 CP770 CP774 DI135
+7 W 1) +14 W 3) +12.6 W
3)
7CP430.60-1 7CP470.60-1 7CP474.60-1 7CP476.60-1 7CP770.60-1 7CP774.60-1 7DI135.70
56 56 56 56 56 56 70
+12.5 W 3) +14 W 3) +12.6 W 3) -0.4 W
Table 1: Module overview: Sorted alphabetically according to product ID
27

Product ID DI138 DI140 DI435 DI439.7 DI439.72 DI645 DM435 DM438 DM465 DO135 DO138 DO164 DO435 DO720 DO721 DO722 EX270 EX470 EX477 EX770 EX777 IF311 IF321 IF361 IF371 ME010 ME020 ME770 MM424 MM432 Description 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter mode, input frequency 20 kHz 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter or incremental encoder operation, input frequency 50 kHz 8 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, termnal block connection 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, D-type connection 8 inputs, 100 - 240 VAC, input delay 50 ms 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, terminal connection 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 16 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 4 FET outputs, 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 4 FET outputs (4 triac couplers), 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input 8 channels, each channel can be declared either as output or input Max. 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A, max. 8 inputs, 24 VDC, inputs delay 1 ms 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A 4 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 4 A 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2.5 A CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply Remote I/O bus controller, 24 VDC supply CAN bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply Remote I/O bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply Interface module with RS232 interface without PW operator panel with PW panel P120 / P121 Interface module with RS485/RS422 interface Interface module with RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP slave) Interface module with CAN interface CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 slot for interface modules Configuration memory for CAN bus controller Motor module, 4 motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms) Motor bridge module, 2 motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30 VDC @ 4 A, peak current up to 8 A (max. 2 s), 12 digital 24 V inputs, optional for limit monitoring and position acquisition (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation) Encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit resolution 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 33 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 33 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 72 pin, cage clamps Power -0.4 W -0.4 W -0.2 W -0.4 W -0.4 W -0.2 W -0.5 W -0.5 W -1.1 W -0.2 W -0.25 W -0.6 W -0.5 W -1.4 W -1.4 W -1.4 W +4 W +14 W 2) +14 W +14 W 3) +14 W -0.5 W -1.6 W -1.4 W -2.6 W -2.5 W -0.35 W -0.7 W -0.1 W -0.5 W -2.5 W Model No. 7DI138.70 7DI140.70 7DI435.7 7DI439.7 7DI439.72 7DI645.7 7DM435.7 7DM438.72 7DM465.7 7DO135.70 7DO138.70 7DO164.70 7DO435.7 7DO720.7 7DO721.7 7DO722.7 7EX270.50-1 7EX470.50-1 7EX477.50-2 7EX770.50-1 7EX777.50-1 7IF311.7 7IF321.7 7IF361.70-1 7IF371.70-1 7ME010.9 7ME020.9 7ME770.5 7MM424.70-1 7MM432.70-1 Page 72 74 76 77 79 81 98 100 102 83 85 87 89 91 93 95 49 50 52 50 52 134 135 136 137 125 127 64 129 131
NC161 TB722 TB722 TB733 TB733 TB736 TB736 TB754 TB754 TB772
-0.3 W -IEncoder* 5.4 V
7NC161.7 7TB722.9 7TB722.91 7TB733.9 7TB733.91 7TB736.9 7TB736.91 7TB754.9 7TB754.91 7TB772.91
139 143 143 144 144 145 145 146 146 147
Table 1: Module overview: Sorted alphabetically according to product ID (cont.)

1) Integrated power supply for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120 2) EX470 with revision 30.xx or higher 3) EX770 with revision 10.xx or higher
28
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Module Overview 1.2 Sorted according to Group

Product ID Description Module Rack BP701.1 BP702 BP702.1 BP703 BP704 BP705 BP706 BP707 BP708 BP709 BP710 Module rack, for 1 module, incl. right side section Module rack, for 2 modules Module rack, for 2 modules, incl. right side section Module rack, for 3 modules Module rack, for 4 modules Module rack, for 5 modules Module rack, for 6 modules Module rack, for 7 modules Module rack, for 8 modules Module rack, for 9 modules Module rack, for 10 modules Bus Controller Modules EX270 EX470 EX477 EX770 EX777 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply Remote I/O bus controller, 24 VDC supply CAN bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply Remote I/O bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply CPUs CP430 CP470 CP474 CP476 CP770 CP774 CPU, 24 VDC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 24 VDC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 750 KByte SRAM, 1.5 MByte FlashPROM, system bus for expansion modules CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM Program Memory Modules ME770 Configuration memory for CAN bus controller Analog Interface (AF) Module AF101 Adapter module AF101 Digital Input Modules DI135 DI138 DI140 DI435 DI439.7 DI439.72 DI645 4 Inputs, 24 VDC, event counter mode: 100 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC 50 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter mode, input frequency 20 kHz 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter or incremental encoder operation, input frequency 50 kHz 8 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, termnal block connection 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, D-type connection 8 inputs, 100 - 240 VAC, input delay 50 ms Digital Output Modules DO135 DO138 DO164 DO435 DO720 DO721 DO722 4 FET outputs, 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 4 FET outputs (4 triac couplers), 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input 8 channels, each channel can be declared either as output or input Max. 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A, max. 8 inputs, 24 VDC, inputs delay 1 ms 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A 4 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 4 A 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2.5 A Digital Mixed Modules DM435 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, terminal connection -0.5 W 7DM435.7 98 -0.2 W -0.25 W -0.6 W -0.5 W -1.4 W -1.4 W -1.4 W 7DO135.70 7DO138.70 7DO164.70 7DO435.7 7DO720.7 7DO721.7 7DO722.7 83 85 87 89 91 93 95 -0.4 W -0.4 W -0.4 W -0.2 W -0.4 W -0.4 W -0.2 W 7DI135.70 7DI138.70 7DI140.70 7DI435.7 7DI439.7 7DI439.72 7DI645.7 70 72 74 76 77 79 81 -0.3 W 7AF101.7 67 -0.1 W 7ME770.5 64 +7 W 3) +14 W 3) +12.6 W 3) +12.5 W 3) +14 W 3) +12.6 W 3) 7CP430.60-1 7CP470.60-1 7CP474.60-1 7CP476.60-1 7CP770.60-1 7CP774.60-1 56 56 56 56 56 56 +4 W +14 W
1)
Power
Model No.
Page
7BP701.1 7BP702.0 7BP702.1 7BP703.0 7BP704.0 7BP705.0 7BP706.0 7BP707.0 7BP708.0 7BP709.0 7BP710.0
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
7EX270.50-1 7EX470.50-1 7EX477.50-2 7EX770.50-1 7EX777.50-1
49 50 52 50 52
+14 W +14 W 2) +14 W
Table 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 sorted according to group
29

Product ID DM438 DM465 Description 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 16 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A Analog Input Modules AI261 AI294 AI351 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge, 24 bit resolution 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge, 13 bit resolution 1 input 10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution + sign -0.6 W -0.5 W U/I: -0.3 W Pot.: -0,7 W -0.5 W -0.4 W 7AI261.7 7AI294.7 7AI351.70 105 107 108 Power -0.5 W -1.1 W Model No. 7DM438.72 7DM465.7 Page 100 102
AI354 AI774
4 inputs 10 V, 12 bit resolution + sign 4 inputs 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution Analog Output Modules
7AI354.70 7AI774.70
109 110
AO352
2 outputs 10 V / 0 - 20 mA Temperature Modules
-1.2 W
7AO352.70
112
AT324 AT352 AT664
4 inputs for temperature sensors (PT100 / PT1000 / KTY10-6 / KTY84-130) 2 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) 4 inputs for thermocouples Other Modules
-0.1 W -0.4 W -0.4 W
7AT324.70 7AT352.70 7AT664.70
114 116 117
CM211
8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 20 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 2 analog inputs 10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution, 2 analog outputs 10 V, 12 bit resolution 3 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 50 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 2 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 3 analog inputs 10 V, 16 bit resolution, 3 analog outputs 10 V, 16 bit resolution CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 slot for interface modules Motor module, 4 motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms) Motor bridge module, 2 motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30 VDC @ 4 A, peak current up to 8 A (max. 2 s), 12 digital 24 V inputs, optional for limit monitoring and position acquisition (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation) Communication Modules
-1.5 W
7CM211.7
120
CM411
-2.4 W
7CM411.70-1
123
ME010 ME020 MM424 MM432
-0.35 W -0.7 W -0.5 W -2.5 W
7ME010.9 7ME020.9 7MM424.70-1 7MM432.70-1
125 127 129 131
IF311 IF321 IF361 IF371
Interface module with RS232 interface without PW operator panel with PW panel P120 / P121 Interface module with RS485/RS422 interface Interface module with RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP slave) Interface module with CAN interface Counter and Positioning Modules
-0.5 W -1.6 W -1.4 W -2.6 W -2.5 W
7IF311.7 7IF321.7 7IF361.70-1 7IF371.70-1
134 135 136 137
NC161
Encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit resolution Accessories
-0.3 W -IEncoder* 5.4 V
7NC161.7
139
AC010 AC011 AC020 TB722 TB722 TB733 TB733 TB736 TB736 TB754 TB754 TB772
5 bus covers 5 stress relief attachments including mounting material 1 bus cover 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 33 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 33 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 72 pin, cage clamps
7AC010.9 7AC011.9 7AC020.9 7TB722.9 7TB722.91 7TB733.9 7TB733.91 7TB736.9 7TB736.91 7TB754.9 7TB754.91 7TB772.91
141 142 141 143 143 144 144 145 145 146 146 147
Table 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 sorted according to group (cont.)
30

Product ID Description Manuals ----B&R 2003 Users Manual, German B&R 2003 Users Manual, English MASYS22003-0 MASYS22003-E 147 147 Power Model No. Page

1) EX470 with revision 30.xx or higher 2) EX770 with revision 10.xx or higher 3) Integrated power supply for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120
31
B&R SYSTEM 2003 General Information
2. General Information
2.1 Dimensions
All modules in the B&R 2003 system have the same dimensions. The dimensions of the B&R SYSTEM 2003 can be seen in the following diagram.
Dimensions [mm] Height Width 7BP7xx.0 7BP70x.1 Depth 115 M x 76.5 + 8.5 M x 76.5 + 4.5 70
M ... Max. number of modules on a module rack (see Module Rack)
Table 3: Dimensions
2.2 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail which conforms to the standard DIN EN 50022 is required to mount the PLC. This mounting rail is to be attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet. Follow the manufacturers installation instructions!
Diagram 1: Mounting Rail
2.3 Module Rack

Module racks for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 are aluminum frames which are available in different widths. Module racks with one or two side sections are used depending on the controller.
32

Example of a module rack with two side sections
Diagram 2: Module Rack
2.3.1 Dimensions All module racks are 115 mm high. Side sections and mounting screws must be included in the width of the module racks. Module racks with two side sections (7BP7xx.0):approx. 8.5 mm Module racks with one side section (7BP70x.1):approx. 4.5 mm
Module Rack BP701.1 BP702.1 BP702 BP703 BP704 BP705 BP706 BP707 BP708 BP709 BP710 Modules 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Width [mm] 81 1) 157.5 1) 161.5 2) 238 2) 314.5 2) 391 2) 467.5 2) 544 2) 620.5 2) 697 2) 773.5 2)
Table 4: Dimensions
1) Includes 4.5 mm for one side section and mounting screws. These module racks are, for example, used together with the EX270 CAN bus controller. 2) Includes 8.5 mm for two side sections and mounting screws.
33
B&R SYSTEM 2003 General Information 2.4 Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2003 modules are divided into five groups: Controller CPUs I/O modules Screw-in modules (ScrM) Expansion modules for CP476
The technical data indicates which group the respective modules belong to. Controller, CPU and I/O modules are hung in the module rack and screwed to a threaded strip which is inserted in the aluminum frame. The electrical connection between the modules is made using a 9 pin D-type plug and socket (simply push the modules together). The risks surrounding typical ribbon cable, and inserting a module into the wrong slot no longer exist. Screw-in modules (ScrM) are installed on the adapter module or on the CP interface. Up to four screw-in modules can be installed on each adapter module or CP interface. B&R 2003 expansion modules for the CPU CP476 are screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side section. 2.4.1 Dimensions of the Controllers, CPUs and I/O Modules These modules are available in single or double widths. The EX270 CAN bus controller is an exception. It is not hung in the module rack, instead it is screwed to the left side of the module rack. Single width
Diagram 3: Dimensions of the controllers, CPUs and I/O modules, single width
34

Double width The depth remains the same (70 mm) as single width modules.
Diagram 4: Dimensions of the controllers, CPUs and I/O modules, double width
CAN Bus Controller EX270
Diagram 5: CAN Bus Controller EX270
35

2.4.2 Dimensions of Screw-in Modules
Diagram 6: Dimensions of Screw-in Modules
2.4.3 Dimensions of expansion modules for CP476 ME010
Diagram 7: Dimensions of expansion modules for CP476, ME010
36

ME020
Diagram 8: Dimensions of expansion modules for CP476, ME020
2.5 Installation Dimensions

2.5.1 Horizontal Installation Note the following dimensions for horizontal installation in a switching cabinet or housing.
Width Height see Section "Module Rack" h = 115 mm without screw-in modules h = 146 mm with screw-in modules
Table 5: Horizontal Installation
There must be at least 30 mm free space above the modules. The cooling vents are not allowed to be covered. Underneath B&R SYSTEM 2003, 35 mm space must be left free for the input, output and supply cables. Standard Installation If the controller is installed in the module rack, 22 mm must be added to the width listed in the "Module Racks" section (column "7BP7xx.0"). Installation with CAN Bus Controller EX270 The CAN Bus Controller EX270 is used together with the module racks having model numbers 7BP70x.1. The EX270 is screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side section. 31 mm is to be added to the width listed in the "Module Rack" section (column "7BP70x.1").
37

2.5.2 Vertical Installation Note the following dimensions for vertical installation in a switching cabinet or housing.
Height Width see section "Module Rack", column "Width" w = 115 mm without screw-in modules w = 146 mm with screw-in modules
Table 6: Vertical Installation
At least 30 mm space must be left free on the left side of the module. The cooling vents are not allowed to be covered. On the right hand side of the B&R SYSTEM 2003, 35 mm space must be left free for the input, output and supply cables. The CPU is held in place by two screws to stop it slipping. Before the module rack can be screwed in place, the threaded strips must be pushed in and the left side section and screws for the right side section must be pre-mounted. The modules must be arranged so that the controller is on the lower end of the module rack. The temperature range is limited to 0 - 50 C when installing modules vertically. Standard Installation If the controller is installed in the module racks, 22 mm must be added to the width listed in the "Module Racks" section (column "7BP7xx.0") when calculating the height. Installation with CAN Bus Controller EX270 The CAN Bus Controller EX270 is used together with the module racks having model numbers 7BP70x.1. The EX270 is screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side section. To calculate the height, 31 mm is to be added to the width listed in the "Module Rack" section (column "7BP70x.1").
38
B&R SYSTEM 2003 General Information 2.6 Installation

The installation is only allowed to be carried out by a qualified personnel! The B&R SYSTEM 2003 is to be installed in the following order: Install mounting rail Install the modules on the module rack Install the entire unit
2.6.1 Modules Chapter 2 B&R SYSTEM 2003 In order to install and fasten the modules on the module rack, you first need to push in the threaded strip and attach the left side section (see following diagram). If the threaded strip has not been pre-installed, push it into the aluminum frame:
Diagram 9: Inserting the threaded strip in the module rack
Attach the left side section to the aluminum frame using two screws. This side section serves as a stop for the first module.
Diagram 10: Fasten left side section to the module rack.
After these preparations are complete, place the modules on the module rack and push them to the left (connecting the modules) and secure them with fastening screws.
39

Install the modules on the module rack (the side section which has already been installed, is not shown in the diagram):
Diagram 11: Installing the modules in the module rack
Push the first module to the left until it reaches the side section.
Diagram 12: Push the first module to the left.
Each module is fastened to the threaded strip on the module rack using two screws. The angled ground connector should also be mounted on the power supply and connected to the module rack. The other modules are installed as described above, pushed to the left and fastened with screws.
Diagram 13: Fasten modules to the module rack
Make sure that the modules are pushed together properly so that there is a proper connection between the modules. After you have installed and fastened all the modules on the module rack, install the right side section.
40

2.6.2 Module Rack The following steps are to be taken to install the module rack on the mounting rail: Open both fastening levers (setting: "OPEN")
Diagram 14: Fastening lever positions
Place the module rack in the desired position on the mounting rail Close both fastening levers (setting: "CLOSE")
Diagram 15: Install the module rack on the mounting rail.
41
B&R SYSTEM 2003 General Information 2.7 Terminal Block

Single row terminal blocks are used to connect the IO modules. These terminal blocks are ejected using two levers. Pressing the ejection lever (using a screw driver) causes the terminal block to be pushed out of the pin connector so it can be easily removed. They are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps. 2.7.1 Cabling Terminal Blocks Daisy Chaining The horizontal arrangement of the terminals allows the supply voltage to be daisy chained: This diagram shows an example of how supply lines can be daisy chained. Pay attention to the required voltages and currents! Daisy chaining is only possible if all modules use the same voltage. Additionally, the maximum current load on the connector is not allowed to be exceeded.
Diagram 16: Cabling terminal blocks
2.7.2 Input and Output Connections The connections for all the inputs and outputs are arranged one on top of the other. This increases clarity on the module and makes it easier to find the correct cable for the corresponding channel during maintenance. Possible exceptions to this rule are listed in the module description.
Diagram 17: Input and output connections
42
B&R SYSTEM 2003 General Information 2.8 Module Slot Rules

2.8.1 Physical Module Slots A physical module slot corresponds to the actual space required for a module. 2003 modules can be single width (= one module slot) or double width (= two module slots), for example like the CP474. Module racks are available in different lengths for the B&R SYSTEM 2003. The palette ranges from one module slot to a max. of 10 module slots. 2.8.2 Logical Module Slots Some modules require more than one logical module slot. That means the number of physical module slots required is different than the number of logical modules slots required (= module addresses or slots in the hardware tree in Automation Studio). The maximum number of logical module slots depends on the controller. The controller also determines how many module slots are available for analog modules (also see section Modules that use Logical or Analog Module Slots). Various controllers are limited as to the maximum number of analog module slots and also as to the module addresses for analog modules. Both conditions must be met.
Controller Maximum Number of Log. Module Slots 1) CP430 CP470 / CP770 CP474 / CP774 CP476 EX270 EX470 / EX770 EX477 / EX777 4 8 12 16 4 8 8 Maximum Number of Analog Slots 1) 2 4 4 4 2 4 4 Possible Module Addresses for Analog Modules 2) 1-4 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-2 1-4 1-8
Table 7: Module slots and possible module addresses for controllers.

1) Attention: Note power output table! 2) All analog modules and modules with logical analog sections must be operated directly next to the controller, that means they must be inserted to the left of the first digital module. Module slots 1 or 1 + 2 are used by the controllers (exception: EX270 does not require a module slot). The first slot to the right of a controller has module address 1 and the module addresses are numbered in increasing order to the right.
Attention: A module slot does not correspond to the module address, it only refers to the actual space required on the module rack. 2.8.3 Modules that use Logical or Analog Module Slots The following table contains an overview of the modules that use two logical module slots or that use an analog module slot. If a module uses two logical module slots and one of these slots is an analog module slot, it is always the first one. The number of logical module slots corresponds to the module addresses used (= slots in the hardware tree in Automation Studio).
Module AF101 DI439 DM465 CM211 CM411 Number of Logical Module Slots 1 2 2 2 2 Number of Analog Module Slots 1 ----1 2 Number of Phys. Module Slots Used 1 1 1 1 1
Table 8: Modules that use logical or analog module slots
43

Configuration Examples Example 1 Configuration with one CP430 and two CM211: Physical module assignments (physical module slots):
Correct Configuration
Diagram 18: Physical module assignments
Logical module assignments (module addresses):
Correct Configuration
Diagram 19: Logical module assignments
Example 2 Configuration with one EX270 and two CM211: Physical module assignments (physical module slots):
Incorrect Configuration
Diagram 20: Physical module assignments
Logical module assignments (module addresses):
Incorrect Configuration
Diagram 21: Logical module assignments
Module slot 3 is not allowed to be used for analog modules on the EX270!
44
B&R SYSTEM 2003 General Information 2.9 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity
The following values are valid for all B&R SYSTEM 2003 modules if no other values are listed in the Technical Data section.
Environmental Temperature during Operation Horizontal Installation Vertical Installation Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 0 to 50 C 5 to 95 %, non-condensing
Table 9: Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity
45
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Module Rack
3. Module Rack
3.1 BP70x
3.1.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Module racks with Two Side Sections 7BP702.0 7BP703.0 7BP704.0 7BP705.0 7BP706.0 7BP707.0 7BP708.0 7BP709.0 7BP710.0 2003 module racks for 2 modules 2003 module racks for 3 modules 2003 module racks for 4 modules 2003 module racks for 5 modules 2003 module racks for 6 modules 2003 module racks for 7 modules 2003 module racks for 8 modules 2003 module racks for 9 modules 2003 module racks for 10 modules Module Racks with One Side Section 7BP701.1 7BP702.1 2003 module rack for 1 module, incl. right side section 2003 module rack for 2 modules, incl. right side section Accessories 7AC010.9 7AC020.9 2003 bus cover, 5 pcs. 2003 bus cover, 1 pcs. Image
Table 10: Order data for BP70x module racks
Technical Data Module racks with two side sections (7BP7xx.0)

Product ID Number of Module Slots C-UL-US Listed Material Fastening the Modules Mounting the Module Rack Dimensions [mm] Height Width 1) Depth 115 161.5 23 115 238 23 115 314.5 23 BP702 2 BP703 3 BP704 4 BP705 5 BP706 6 Yes Aluminum Hang modules in the rack and screw into place (threaded strips in frame) Integrated mounting mechanics (standard mounting rail) 115 391 23 115 467.5 23 115 544 23 115 620.5 23 115 697 23 115 773.5 23 BP707 7 BP708 8 BP709 9 BP710 10
Table 11: Technical data for module racks 7Bp7xx.0

1) Includes 8.5 mm for two side sections and mounting screws.
Module racks with one side section (7BP70x.1) These module racks are, for example, used together with the EX270 CAN bus controller.
Product ID Number of Module Slots C-UL-US Listed Material Fastening the Modules Mounting the Module Rack Dimensions [mm] Height Width 1) Depth 115 81 23 BP701 1 Yes Aluminum Hang modules in the rack and screw into place (threaded strips in frame) Integrated mounting mechanics (standard mounting rail) 115 157.5 23 BP702 2
Table 12: Technical data for module racks 7BP70x.1

1) Includes 4.5 mm for one side section and mounting screws.
46

Module Address The module address is determined by the controller and the module slot. The CP interface is accessed using module address 0.
Diagram 22: Module Address
47
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Bus Controller Modules
4. Bus Controller Modules

4.1 CAN Bus Controller
A CAN bus controller takes over the communication with a PLC, PLC or other CAN capable devices. Additionally, a CAN bus controller handles the following tasks Initialization from power on to active operation on a network Evaluating and sending input states Sending input states cyclically and/or when the input state changes Receiving and switching the outputs Defined error behavior for network crashes and local problems Setting and changing the operating parameters can be done either with a special instruction which is sent from a CAN client (master) or using configuration memory.
4.2 Remote I/O Bus Controller

A remote I/O bus controller takes over communication between a B&R remote master (B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner) and the B&R 2003 I/O system. The controller has the following local tasks Initialization from power on to active operation on a network Evaluating and sending input states (polled by master) Receiving and switching the outputs Defined error behavior for network crashes and local problems
4.3 Overview
Module EX270 EX470 EX477 EX770 EX777 Description 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 4 W supply, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, Order TB712 terminal block separately! 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 14.5 W supply, 2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable 2003 remote I/O bus controller, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to remote I/O bus 2003 CAN bus controller, 100-240 VAC, 14.5 W supply, 2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable 2003 remote I/O bus controller, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to remote I/O bus
Table 13: Bus controller module overview
48
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Bus Controller Modules 4.4 EX270

4.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CAN Bus Controller 7EX270.50-1 7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 4 W supply, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Image
Terminal block is not included in the delivery (see "General Accessories"). Additional accessories see sections Accessories and Manuals.
Table 14: EX270 order data
4.4.2 Technical Data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Module Width Installation Peripherals Diagnosis LED I/O Bus Interface Number Switch Standard Communication Interface Application Interface Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Power Consumption Output Power for I/O Modules and Screw-in Modules Voltage Monitoring 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 5 W Max. 4 W The power supply is only activated starting with an input voltage of approx. +15 V. Therefore the Status LED DC OK is not necessary. CAN Interface Yes 12 pin multipoint connector 1,000m 500 kBaud Yes 9 pin D-type socket Used to set the node number and baudrate in preparation B&R 2003 Controller 20 mm The controller is screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side plate EX270
Table 15: EX270 technical data
49
Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Bus Controller Modules 4.5 EX470 / EX770

4.5.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CAN Bus Controller 7EX470.50-1 7EX770.50-1 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 14.5 W supply, 2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable 2003 CAN bus controller, 100-240 VAC, 14.5 W supply, 2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable Accessories 7AC911.9 0AC912.9 0AC913.92 7ME770.5 Bus connector, CAN Bus adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable 2003 configuration memory for CAN bus controller Image
Additional accessories see sections Accessories and Manuals.
Table 16: EX470/EX770 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Module Width Module Slot Environmental Temperature during Operation Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs I/O Bus Interface Number Switch Standard Communication Interfaces Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate Application Interface IF2 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC 85 VAC 100 - 240 VAC 264 VAC CAN interface (left) Yes 9 pin D-type plug 1,000 m 500 kBaud CAN/ID interface (right) Yes 9 pin D-type socket 1,000 m 500 kBaud Yes 9 pin D-type socket Used to set the node number and baudrate Yes B&R 2003 Controller B&R 2003 single width 1 0 - 60 C 1)
2)
EX470
EX770
Table 17: EX470/EX770 technical data
50

Product ID Input Voltage Frequency Power Consumption Output Power for I/O Modules and Screw-in Modules EX470 --Max. 20 W 14.5 W 1) 2) EX770 47 to 63 Hz
Table 17: EX470/EX770 technical data (cont.)

1) EX470 with revision 30.xx or higher 2) EX770 with revision 10.xx or higher
51

4.6.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Remote I/O Bus Controller 7EX477.50-2 7EX777.50-1 2003 Remote I/O Bus Controller, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus 2003 Remote I/O Bus Controller, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS Networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
Table 18: EX477/EX777 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Module Width Module Slot Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs I/O Bus Interface Number Switch Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 100 kBit/s 181 kBit/s 500 kBit/s 1000 kBit/s 2000 kBit/s Remote I/O Bus Access Procedure Number of Slaves Topology Connection to the Bus Transfer Media Termination Resistance Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC 85 VAC 100 - 240 VAC 264 VAC RS485 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m Max. 200 m Max. 100 m Master-slave principle Max. 31 (without repeater) Physical bus Direct Shielded, twisted pair External Yes 9 pin D-type socket Used to set the remote address Yes B&R 2003 Controller B&R 2003 single width 1 EX477 EX777
52

Product ID Input Voltage Frequency Power Consumption Output Power for I/O Modules and Screw-in Modules EX477 --Max. 20 W 14 W EX777 47 to 63 Hz
53
B&R SYSTEM 2003 CPUs
5. CPUs
The CPU is operated on the far left of the module rack. The module has status LEDs and connection plugs for an RS232 and a CAN interface. The CPUs CP474/CP476/CP774 are equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The required screw-in modules are inserted into the CP interface and screwed firmly into place.
5.2 RS232 Interface

The RS232 interface is primarily intended for programming the CPU. It can also be used as a general interface (e.g. P121 visualization, printer, bar code reader, etc.).
5.3 CAN Interface

Standard field bus interface for communication with other control systems. Remote I/O expansion using B&R 2003 components and a CAN bus controller, e.g. EX470.
5.4 Local I/O Expansion using B&R 2003 Modules

Digital I/O (24 VDC or 120/230 VAC) Analog I/O (10 V, 0 - 20 mA, thermocouple, PT100, etc.) Incremental encoder or SSI encoder connection (100 kHz, +5 VDC encoder supply)
5.5 Local I/O on the CPU (4 slots)

The CPUs CP474/CP476/CP774 are equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The following screw-in modules can be inserted: Analog I/O modules Incremental encoder or SSI encoder connection (B&R 2003) Digital I/O (24 VDC technology) Additional serial interfaces (max. 3 channels)
5.6 Application Examples

Counting and measuring digital signals (4 MHz) Positioning (analog) Stepper motor control Drum sequencer Pulse width modulated outputs Reaction of digital outputs to input events in the s range
54
B&R SYSTEM 2003 CPUs 5.7 Programming

The CPU is programmed using Automation Studio or the PG2000 programming system. Several programming languages are available:
Automation Studio Automation Basic (previously PL2000) ANSI C IEC 1131 Ladder Diagram (LAD) IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) IEC 1131 Structured Text (ST) PG2000 Instruction List (IL) Ladder Diagram (LAD) PL2000 High Level Language (structured text)
Table 20: CPU Programming
5.8 Backup Battery

Data buffering and nonvolatile operation of the real-time clock are guaranteed by the lithium battery provided.
5.9 Programming the FlashPROM

Programming and deleting the built-in FlashPROM memory takes place using the programming system.
5.10 Legend Sheets

A legend sheet can be slid into the front of the CPUs CP474/CP476/CP774 from above. These sheets can be used for labeling the screw in modules.
5.11 Overview
Module CP430 CP470 CP474 CP476 CP770 CP774 Description 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 7 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 64 digital / 32 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 350 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 750 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.5 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, system bus for expansion modules, max. 272 digital / 80 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points
Table 21: CPU overview
55
IEC 1131 Instruction List (IL)
B&R SYSTEM 2003 CPUs 5.12 CP430 / CP47x / CP77x

5.12.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU 7CP430.60-1 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 7 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable, max. 64 digital / 32 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 350 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0AC201.9 7AC911.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell Bus Connector, CAN CP430, CP470, CP770 Image
7CP470.60-2
7CP474.60-1
7CP770.60-1
7CP774.60-1
Backup battery is not included in the delivery. Additional accessories see sections Accessories and Manuals.
CP474, CP774
Table 22: CP430/CP47x/CP77x order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Module Width Module Slot Processor Section Command Cycle Time 1.6 s Standard Memory User RAM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery Buffer Current Typical Maximum HW Watchdog 1.6 A 60 A 100 KByte SRAM 256 KByte FlashPROM 256 KByte FlashPROM Average value with 70 % bit and 30 % analog processing 1.6 s 350 / 100 KByte SRAM 512 / 256 KByte FlashPROM 512 / 256 KByte FlashPROM Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh 1.6 A 60 A Yes 2.2 A 110 A 0.8 s 100 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 512 KByte FlashPROM in preparation B&R 2003 CPU B&R 2003 single width 1 Yes B&R 2003 CPU B&R 2003 single width 1 Yes B&R 2003 CPU B&R 2003 double width 1+2 CP430 CP470 / CP770 CP474 / CP774
Table 23: CP430/CP47x/CP77x technical data
56

Product ID Voltage Monitoring Peripherals Real-time Clock Resolution Status Display I/O Bus Interface Slots for Screw-in Modules Suitable for IF Modules Standard Communication Interfaces No Nonvolatile 1s LEDs 9 pin D-type socket No 4 1-3 CP430 CP470 / CP770 The internal supply is monitored for overvoltage and undervoltage CP474 / CP774
Application Interface IF2 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Power Consumption Output Power for I/O Ports CP430 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC --Max. 9.5 W 7 W 1)
CAN Yes 9 pin D-type plug 1,000 m 500 kBaud CP470 / CP474 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC --Max. 20 W CP470: 14 W 1) CP474: 12.6 W 1) CP770 / CP774 85 VAC 100 -240 VAC 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz Max. 20 W CP770: 14 W 1) CP774: 12.6 W 1)
Table 23: CP430/CP47x/CP77x technical data

1) Integrated power supply on pin 4 of the RS232 interface for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120.
57
Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate
RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud

5.12.3 General Information The CPU is operated on the far left of the module rack. The module has status LEDs and connection plugs for an RS232 and a CAN interface. The CP474/CP774 CPUs are equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The required screw-in modules are inserted into the CP interface and screwed firmly into place. The screw-in interface modules can be operated in slots 1, 2 and 3.
Diagram 23: CP474/CP774 general information
5.12.4 Module Overview The following screw-in modules can be used on the CP interface:
Module 7AI261.7 7AI294.7 7AI351.70 7AI354.70 7AI774.70 7AO352.70 7AT324.70 7AT352.70 7AT664.70 7DI135.70 7DI138.70 7DI140.70 7DO135.70 7DO138.70 7DO164.70 Type Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog OUT Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Digital IN Digital IN Digital IN Digital OUT Digital OUT Digital OUT Description 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge 1 x 10 V or 1 x 0 - 20 mA (1 x 20 mA also possible), potentiometer operation 4 x 10 V 4 x 0 - 20 mA (4 x 20 mA also possible) 2 x 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 4 x temperature sensor (PT100, PT1000, KTY10 or KTY84) 2 x PT100 3-line 4 x thermocouple 4 x 24 VDC, 50 kHz 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter operation 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter / incremental encoder operation 4 x 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz 8 x 24 VDC, 0.5 A 4 x 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input
Table 24: Module overview
58

Module 7IF311.7 7IF321.7 7IF361.70-1 7IF371.70-1 7NC161.7 Type Interface Interface Interface Interface Encoder module Description 1 x RS232 1 x RS485/RS422 1 x PROFIBUS DP Slave 1 x CAN 1 x 100 kHz, 5 / 24 VDC
Table 24: Module overview (cont.)
59
B&R SYSTEM 2003 CPUs 5.13 CP476

5.13.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU 7CP476.60-1 2003 CPU, 750 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.5 W supply, 1 RS232, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, system bus for expansion modules, max. 272 digital / 80 analog I/O points Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0AC201.9 7AC911.9 7ME010.9 7ME020.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell Bus Connector, CAN 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts Image
Backup battery is not included in the delivery. Additional accessories see sections Accessories and Manuals.
Table 25: CP476 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Module Width Module Slot Processor Section Additional I/O Processor Instruction Cycle Time (average value for 70 % bit and 30 % analog processing) Standard Memory User RAM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery Buffer Current Typical Maximum HW Watchdog Voltage Monitoring Peripherals Real-time Clock Resolution Status Display I/O Bus Interface (right side) System Bus for Expansions (left side) Slots for Screw-in Modules Suitable for IF Modules Standard Communication Interfaces Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud Nonvolatile 1s LEDs 9 pin D-type socket PCMCIA memory card ME010 B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module insert ME020 4 1-3 Handles I/O data points 0.5 s in preparation B&R 2003 CPU B&R 2003 double width 1+2 CP476
750 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 1.5 MByte FlashPROM Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh 2.2 A 110 A Yes The internal supply is monitored for overvoltage and undervoltage
Table 26: CP476 technical data
60

Product ID Application Interface IF2 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Power Consumption Output Power for I/O Ports 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 20 W 12.5 W 1) CP476 CAN Yes 9 pin D-type plug 1,000 m 500 kBaud
Table 26: CP476 technical data (cont.)

1) Integrated power supply on pin 4 of the RS232 interface for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120.
5.13.3 General Information With the addition of the CP476, the B&R SYSTEMS 2003 now has a CPU with outstanding technical properties. Features 750 KByte User SRAM 1.5 MByte User FlashPROM Additional I/O processor System bus for expansions CP interface with four slots Two node number switches
Memory capacity was increased to meet the requirements of our customers. The CP476 extends the CPU performance spectrum for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 at the top end. Compared to the CP474, the new CPU increases performance by at least a 50 % because the clock frequency is 50 % higher and the integration of an additional I/O processor. This reduces the interrupt load considerably and decreases the analog update time on the left side by up to a factor of 2 (screw-in modules 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 are processed parallel to each other). The I/O update on the left side tales place independently of the right side. The CPU CP476 is equipped with a system bus for expansions. The following expansions can be used: ME010 expansion module for PCMCIA memory cards ME020 expansion module for PCMCIA memory cards and a slot for B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts
Two CAN node number switches guarantee that an offset no longer has to be set. The actual node number always corresponds to the switch setting. 5.13.4 CP Interface The CPU is equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The required screw-in modules are inserted into the CP interface and screwed firmly into place. To reduce the load on the CPU, an additional I/O processor handles operation of the all I/O data points on the CP interface and the I/O bus interface (right side). The I/O processor handles slots 1 and 3 as well as 2 and 4 in succession (multiplex operation). That means slots 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 are operated parallel to each other.
61

The screw-in interface modules can be operated in slots 1, 2 and 3.
Diagram 24: CP Interface
5.13.5 Module Overview The following screw-in modules can be used on the CP interface:
Module 7AI261.7 7AI294.7 7AI351.70 7AI354.70 7AI774.70 7AO352.70 7AT324.70 7AT352.70 7AT664.70 7DI135.70 7DI138.70 7DI140.70 7DO135.70 7DO138.70 7DO164.70 7IF311.7 7IF321.7 7IF361.70-1 7IF371.70-1 7NC161.7 Type Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog OUT Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Digital IN Digital IN Digital IN Digital OUT Digital OUT Digital OUT Interface Interface Interface Interface Encoder module Description 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge 1 x 10 V or 1 x 0 - 20 mA (1 x 20 mA also possible), potentiometer operation 4 x 10 V 4 x 0 - 20 mA (4 x 20 mA also possible) 2 x 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 4 x temperature sensor (PT100, PT1000, KTY10 or KTY84) 2 x PT100 3-line 4 x thermocouple 4 x 24 VDC, 50 kHz 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter operation 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter / incremental encoder operation 4 x 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz 8 x 24 VDC, 0.5 A 4 x 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input 1 x RS232 1 x RS485/RS422 1 x PROFIBUS DP Slave 1 x CAN 1 x 100 kHz, 5 / 24 VDC
Table 27: Module overview
62
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Program Memory Modules

6.1 Overview
Module ME770 Description 2003 configuration memory for CAN bus controller
Table 28: Application memory modules overview
63
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Program Memory Modules 6.2 ME770

6.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 7ME770.5 Short Description 2003 configuration memory for CAN bus controller Image
Also see section "Bus Controller Modules EX470/EX770".
Table 29: ME770 order data

Product ID C-UL-US Listed Memory Type Programming ME770 Programmed using Interface Connection Power Consumption ME770 Yes 4 KBit S-EEPROM Must be connected to CAN bus controller CAN Library for PG2000, CAN Configurator 9 pin D-type plug 0.1 W
Table 30: ME770 technical data
6.2.3 Description All operating parameters for a node are stored in nonvolatile configuration memory. When switched on, the node is initialized with the parameters in the configuration memory. Data is taken from configuration memory if, a) the node number set on the module corresponds to the one stored, or b) the node number on the module is set to 0.
64
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Interface (AF) Module
7. Analog Interface (AF) Module

Screw-in modules are installed either on the CP interface or on the adapter module and then screwed into place:
Diagram 25: Analog interface (AF) module general information
7.2 Overview
Module AF101 Description 2003 adapter module, 4 slots for screw-in modules
Table 31: Analog interface (AF) module overview
7.3 Module Overview

The following screw-in modules can be used on the AF101 adapter module:
Module 7AI261.7 7AI294.7 7AI351.70 7AI354.70 7AI774.70 7AO352.70 7AT324.70 7AT352.70 7AT664.70 Type Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Analog OUT Analog IN Analog IN Analog IN Description 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge 1 x 10 V or 1 x 0 - 20 mA (1 x 20 mA also possible), potentiometer operation 4 x 10 V 4 x 0 - 20 mA (4 x 20 mA also possible) 2 x 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 4 x temperature sensor (PT100, PT1000, KTY10 or KTY84) 2 x PT100 3-line 4 x thermocouple
Table 32: Analog interface (AF) module overview
65
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Interface (AF) Module

Module 7DI135.70 7DI138.70 7DI140.70 7DO135.70 7DO138.70 7DO164.70 7NC161.7 Type Digital IN Digital IN Digital IN Digital OUT Digital OUT Digital OUT Encoder module Description 4 x 24 VDC, 50 kHz 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter operation 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter / incremental encoder operation 4 x 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz 8 x 24 VDC, 0.5 A 4 x 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input 1 x 100 kHz, 5 / 24 VDC
Table 32: Analog interface (AF) module overview (cont.)
66
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Interface (AF) Module 7.4 AF101

7.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AF101.7 Short Description 2003 adapter module, 4 slots for screw-in modules Image
Table 33: AF101 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770 CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770 EX477, EX777 Adapter Interface Electrical Isolation Status LEDs Power Consumption Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Yes 2 4 AF101
4 slots for screw-in modules No For each channel Max. 0.3 W
Table 34: Analog interface (AF) module technical data
67
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Input Modules
8. Digital Input Modules

Digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the PLC. The states of the digital inputs are shown with status LEDs. The distinguishing features relevant for the input modules are: Number of inputs Input voltage Input delay (filter) Special functions (e.g. counter inputs)
8.2 Input Filter

An input filter is available for each input. The input delay is shown in the technical data sections. Disturbance pulses which are shorter than input delay are suppressed by the input filter.
Diagram 26: Digital input modules
8.3 Screw-in Module Overview

Module Number of Inputs Nominal Input Voltage Input Frequency Incremental Encoder Operation Event Counter Operation Number of Outputs Nominal Switching Voltage Continuous Current Switching Frequency DI135 4 24 VDC 50 kHz 100 kHz 1 24 VDC 0.5 A Max. 20 kHz with resistive load
Table 35: DI135 overview

Module Number of Inputs Nominal Input Voltage Input Delay Incremental Encoder Amount Input Frequency Evaluation Event Counter Amount Input Frequency Count Frequency DI138 10 24 VDC 1.3 ms --1 50 kHz 4-fold 2 20 kHz 40 kHz 2 50 kHz 100 kHz DI140 10 24 VDC 1.3 ms
Table 36: DI138 / DI140 overview
68
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Input Modules 8.4 I/O Module Overview
Module Number of Inputs Input Voltage Input Delay Remarks DI435 8 24 VDC 1 ms DI439.7 16 24 VDC 1 ms Conn.: Pin connector DI439.72 16 24 VDC 1 ms Conn.: D-type plug DI645 8 100 - 240 VAC 50 ms
Table 37: I/O module overview
69
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Input Modules 8.5 DI135

8.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI135.70 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 4 inputs 24 VDC, sink, incremental encoder operation: 50 kHz, event counter operation: 100 kHz, 1 comparator output 24 VDC, screw-in module, Order terminal block TB712 separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02
Terminal block is not included in the delivery (see "General Accessories").
Table 38: DI135 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Frequency Incremental Encoder Operation Event Counter Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Electrical Isolation Incremental Encoder Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Phase Offset between Channel A and B Counter Size Inputs Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Event Counter Signal Form Input Frequency Counter Size Square wave pulse 100 kHz 2 x 16 Bit Square wave pulse 4-fold 50 kHz 200 kHz 90 25 32 Bit Channel A Channel B Reference Pulse R Reference enable switch ENR 4 Sink 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC 50 kHz 100 kHz <5 V >15 V Max. 3 s (at 18 - 30 V) 8 mA Input - PLC Yes B&R 2003 screw-in module AF101 adapter module, CP interface Power Panel interface Max. 0.4 W DI135
Table 39: DI135 technical data
70

Product ID Inputs Input 1 Input 2 Outputs Number of Outputs Operating Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current Maximum Switching Frequency Braking Voltage Diagnosis Electrical Isolation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module 1 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC 0.5 A 20 kHz with resistive load DI135 Counter 1 Counter 2
Reverse polarity protection, short-circuit protection, software monitors status Output - PLC
Table 39: DI135 technical data (cont.)
8.5.3 General Information The DI135 screw-in module can be used for the following tasks: Counting and measuring digital signals (internal measuring frequency 4 MHz) Gate measurement Frequency measurement Event counting Incremental encoder operation Reaction to input events in the s range Local counter status monitoring with direct output control
71
45 V to 55 V

8.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI138.70 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 10 inputs 24 VDC, sink, 2 inputs for event counter operation, input frequency 20 kHz, screw-in module, Order terminal block TB712 separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Design Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Current Inputs 5 and 6 Other Inputs Input Delay Inputs 5 and 6 Other Inputs Electrical Isolation Event Counter Signal Form Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Inputs Input 5 Input 6 Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module Square wave pulse 20 kHz 40 kHz 16 Bit Counter 1 Counter 2 8 mA @ 24 VDC 5 mA @ 24 VDC Max. 3 s Max. 1.3 ms Input - PLC 10 IEC1131 - Type 1 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V in preparation B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface Max. 0.4 W DI138
72

8.6.3 General Information The DI138 digital input module is a screw-in module for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 and for the B&R Power Panel. It has 10 inputs for 24 VDC, two of which are equipped with counter functions. The module is also equipped with supply voltage monitoring.
73

8.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI140.70 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 10 inputs 24 VDC, sink, 2 inputs for event counter operation or for direction dependant position evaluation, input frequency 50 kHz, 4 inputs can be used as high speed inputs (e.g. gate, frequency measurement), screw-in module, Order terminal block TB712 separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Design Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Current Input Delay Inputs 8, 9, 10 Other Inputs Electrical Isolation Incremental Encoder Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Inputs Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Event Counter Signal Form Input Frequency Count Frequency Square wave pulse 50 kHz 100 kHz Square wave pulse 4-fold 50 kHz 200 kHz 32 Bit Channel A Channel B Reference Pulse R Reference Enable Switch 10 IEC1131 - Type 1 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V 8 mA @ 24 VDC Max. 1.3 ms Max. 3 s Input - PLC in preparation B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module AF101 adapter module, CP interface Power Panel interface Max. 0.4 W DI140
74

Product ID Counter Size Inputs Input 5 Input 6 Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module DI140 32 Bit Counter 1 Counter 2
8.7.3 General Information The DI140 digital input module is a screw-in module for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 and for the B&R Power Panel. It has 10 inputs for 24 VDC, four of which are equipped with counter functions. There are two types of operation, event counter and encoder operation. The DI140 provides TPU functionality. The module is also equipped with supply voltage monitoring.
75

8.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI435.7 7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 8 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Image
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "General Accessories").

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Input - PLC B&R 2003 I/O module 8 Sink or source 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms (at 18 - 30 V) Approx. 8 mA (sink/source) Yes, supply voltage >18 V Max. 0.2 W Yes 4 8 DI435
76
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Input Modules 8.9 DI439.7

8.9.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI439.7 7TB718.9 7TB718.91 7TB718:90-02 7TB718:91-02 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 18 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 46: DI439.7 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount 1) CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, EX470, EX770 EX477, EX777 CP474, CP774 CP476 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Power Consumption Operating Characteristics B&R 2003 I/O module 16 Sink or source 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms (at 18 - 30 V) Approx. 4 mA (sink/source) Yes, supply voltage >18 V Max. 0.4 W in preparation 2 4 DI439.7
6 8
Table 47: DI439.7 technical data
77

Product ID Electrical Isolation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width DI439.7 Input - PLC

1) Two logical module slots are required by the module.
78
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Input Modules 8.10 DI439.72

8.10.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI439.72 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 2 electrically isolated input groups Image
Connection made using D-type connector.
Table 48: DI439.72 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, EX470, EX770 EX477, EX777, CP474, CP774 CP476 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 2 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Power Consumption B&R 2003 I/O module 16 8 Sink or source 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms (at 18 - 30 V) Approx. 4 mA (sink/source) Yes, supply voltage >18 V Max. 0.4 W
1)
DI439.72
in preparation 2 4
6 8
79

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Yes Yes DI439.72
Table 49: DI439.7 technical data (cont.)

80

8.11.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DI645.7 7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 Short Description 2003 digital input module, 8 inputs 100-240 VAC, 50 ms, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current 100 VAC / 60 Hz 240 VAC / 50 Hz Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Input - PLC B&R 2003 I/O module 8 Sink or source 85 VAC 100 - 240 VAC 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz <40 VAC at 2 mA >79 VAC Max. 50 ms (at 85 - 264 VAC) Approx. 5 mA Approx. 11 mA Yes, supply voltage >85 VAC Max. 0.2 W Yes 4 8 DI645
81
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Output Modules
9. Digital Output Modules

Digital output modules are used for controlling external loads (relays, motors, solenoid). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs. The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are: Number of outputs Type (relay, transistors) Switching voltage Continuous current
9.2 Protective Circuit

The transistor output module DO435 has overload protection and an internal protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching of inductive loads without inverse diodes. The relay output module DO720 requires external overload protection (fuse). On the relay output module DO721, each output is protected against overload by a fuse.
9.3 Screw-in Module Overview

Module Number of Outputs Design Type Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Ignition Pulse Current Switching Frequency DO135 4 FET Push/Pull switch 11.4 VDC 12 - 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.1 A Max. 0.4 A --Max. 100 kHz DO138 8 FET Positive switching 10.5 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 2 A --Max. 100 Hz DO164 4 Triac Coupler ---
48 - 125 VAC
Max. 0.05 A Max. 0.2 A Max. 0.5 A 96 - 126 Hz
Table 52: Screw-in module overview
9.4 I/O Module Overview

Module Number of Outputs Design Type Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 8 A DO435 Max. 8 FET DO720 8 Relay Normally open DO721 4 Relay Change-over contact DO722 8 Relay Normally open
240 VAC / 30 VDC 264 VAC / 110 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 12 A
240 VAC / 24 VDC 264 VAC / 125 VDC Max. 4 A Max. 16 A
240 VAC / 24 VDC 264 VAC / 125 VDC Max. 2.5 A Max. 20 A
Table 53: I/O module overview
82
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Output Modules 9.5 DO135

9.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DO135.70 7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 4 FET outputs 12 to 24 VDC, 0.1 A, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 54: DO135 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Design Type Switching Voltage/Supply Minimum Nominal Maximum Protection Continuous Current per Output Module Maximum Switching Frequency Residual Voltage Capacitive Load Power Consumption Protection Characteristics Protection Short Circuit Protection Overload Protection Short Circuit Current Diagnosis Status for SW Evaluation Overvoltage Undervoltage Overcurrent Monitoring Yes Yes 0.11 - 0.3 A Us >30 VDC a voltage >35 VDC for t >5 ms will damage the outputs Us <10.5 VDC Functions with a duty cycle of at least 10 s B&R 2003 screw-in module 4 FET Push/Pull switch 11.4 VDC 12 - 24 VDC 30 VDC Reverse polarity protection Max. 0.1 A Max. 0.4 A 100 kHz Max. 0.6 V at 0.1 A Max. 20 nF, an overcurrent warning is given when switching large capacitive loads Max. 0.2 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface Power Panel interface DO135
Table 55: DO135 technical data
83

Product ID Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay Typical Maximum Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No <2 s 2.4 s DO135
Table 55: DO135 technical data (cont.)
9.5.3 General Information The DO135 is a 4 channel output module. The operating mode can be set separately for each output. The following operating modes are available: Normal operation Pulse width modulation (PWM) TPU operation
Normal Operation The outputs are switched on/off. Pulse Width Modulation Output are switched on/off periodically. Pulse width ratio, period duration and resolution can be set.
Diagram 27: Pulse width modulation
TPU Operation In TPU operation, the outputs are controlled by the TPU. If, for example, the DO135 module is inserted in the first slot of the CP interface, the first output can be operated using the LTX function LTXdo0(). 9.5.4 Special Functions The supply voltage is tested over a valid range (10.5 VDC < Us < 30 VDC) The channels are equipped with a readable power cut-off.
84

9.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DO138.70 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 8 outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, short circuit protection, thermal overload protection, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Static Characteristics Number of Outputs Type Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Switching Voltage/Supply Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Residual Voltage Continuous Short Circuit Current Switching On after Overload Cutoff Power Consumption Internal 24 VDC Supply Protection 8 FET positive switching Yes No 10.5 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 2A To increase the output current, outputs can be switched in parallel. 12 A 0.2 V @ 0.5 A Typ. 4 A Automatically within seconds (depends on the module temperature) 0.25 W 1.5 W Thermal cutoff Integrated protection for switching inductances Reverse polarity protection in preparation B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module AF101 adapter module, CP interface Power Panel interface DO138
Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Switching Frequency Resistive Load Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module Max. 450 ms Max. 450 ms Max. 100 Hz 47 VDC
85

9.6.3 General Information The DO138 digital output module is a screw-in module for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 and for the B&R Power Panel with 8 outputs. Channels 0 to 3 can also be used by TPU (note max. switching frequency).
86

9.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DO164.70 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 4 FET outputs 48 to 125 VAC, 0.05 A, zero cross detection, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Module Type Zero Voltage Input (connection pins 11 and 12) Number of Inputs Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Input Impedance in Signal Range Switching Threshold Low Range High Range Switching Hysteresis Tolerance of the Zero Cross Signal at 48 to 125 VAC Electrical Isolation Triac Outputs Number of Outputs Type of Outputs 1) Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Output Current Continuous Current Ignition Pulse Current Residual Voltage Holding Current Leakage Current (0 signal) 4 Triac coupler, only to control power triacs or nonparallel thyristors 48 to 125 VAC 48 to 63 Hz Max. 50 mA Max. 0.5 A Max. 2.5 V at 50 mA Max. 3.5 mA Max. 1 A 1 48 to 125 VAC 48 to 63 Hz 1 M symmetric, 500 k to GND <-5 V >+5 V 0.2 V 0 to 100 s No in preparation AF101 adapter module, CP interface B&R 2003 screw-in module DO164
87

Product ID Critical Rate of Rise of Commutating Voltage when Switched Off Drive Pulse Duration TDP (TPU outputs) Power Consumption Product ID Protection Characteristics Protection Type of External Protective Circuit RC Combination Gate Resistance Dynamic Characteristics Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - Output Output - Output Recommended Cable Types Line Length to Power Triac Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module Yes Yes Twisted pair cabling to the terminal pairs Max. 10 m Max. 200 s Max. 200 s No short circuit protection Reduced dV/dt Increased immunity to disturbances DO164 >500 V/s >250 s Max. 0.6 W DO164

1) Because of the very low (dV/dt)c value of the triac coupler ("Critical Rate of Rise of Commutating Voltage"), the triac output is not suitable for use as SSR relay for direct switching of loads.
9.7.3 General Information The screw-in module DO164 is equipped with four output channels. It is used to send ignition pulses (triac coupler) for phase-angle control of power triacs. The module is installed on the adapter module or on the CP interface.
88

9.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DO435.7 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 8 FET outputs 24 VDC, 2 A, each output can be optionally used as an input, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Power Consumption Outputs Number of Outputs Type Switching Voltage/Supply Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Simultaneousness at 1 A at 2 A Residual Voltage Protection Short Circuit Protection Overload Protection Short Circuit Current at 24 V Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Max. 8 FET 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 8 A 100 % 50 % (note derating curve) Max. 1 V at 2 A Yes Yes Approx. 20 A until switched off Approx. 46 V Yes B&R 2003 I/O module, single width 4 8 Yes, supply voltage >18 V Max. 0.5 W DO435
89

Product ID Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Max. Switching Frequency Resistive Load Inductive Load Electrical Isolation DO435 Approx. 200 s Typ. 50 s / max. 250 s Typ. 170 s / max. 250 s 100 Hz see "Switching Inductive Loads" Output - PLC
With this module, each channel can be used either as an input or output. All outputs must first be declared as such. Each time the module is turned on, all channels are configured as inputs. Technical Data for the Inputs
Product ID Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Electrical Isolation DO435 Max. 8 Sink 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms (at 18 - 30 V) Approx. 6 mA Input - PLC
Table 62: Technical Data for the Inputs
90

9.9.1 Order Data
Order Data Model Number 7DO720.7 7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 8 relay outputs 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount EX270 CP430 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Type Switching Voltage Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Contact Resistance Maximum Switching Power (AC) Maximum Switching Power (DC) Power Consumption Protection Characteristics Short Circuit Protection Dynamic Characteristics Fuse 16 AT (common connection) B&R 2003 I/O module 8 Relay / N.O. 240 VAC / 30 VDC 264 VAC / 110 VDC 2A 12 A 30 m at 6 VDC, 1 A 480 VA 60 W Max. 1.4 W Yes 2 4 8 DO720
91

Product ID Switching Delay log 0 - log 1 log 1 - log 0 Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Dielectric Strength Contact - Contact Contact - Coil Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Output - PLC 750 VAC / 1 min 2000 VAC / 1 min DO720 Max. 10 ms Max. 10 ms
92

9.10.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DO721.7 7AC011.9 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 4 relay outputs 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 4 A 2003 stress relief attachment, 5 pcs., incl. mounting material Image
Terminal blocks are included in the delivery.

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount EX270 CP430 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Type Switching Voltage Nominal at 4 A Maximum Maximum Voltage Relay - Relay Continuous Current per Output Module Starting Current Contact Resistance Maximum Switching Power (AC) Maximum Switching Power (DC) Power Consumption Protection Characteristics Short Circuit Protection Fuse T 5A H / 250 V per output B&R 2003 I/O module 4 isolated channels Relay / Changeover 240 VAC / 24 VDC 264 VAC / 125 VDC 460 VAC 4A 16 A 15 A / 200 ms 100 m at 6 VDC, 100 mA 1000 VA 120 W at 30 VDC Max. 1.4 W Yes 2 4 8 DO721
93

Product ID Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay log 0 - log 1 log 1 - log 0 Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Dielectric Strength Contact - Contact Contact - PLC Relay - Relay Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Output - PLC, Output - Output 1.4 kV with 1.2 x 50 s pulse 4 kV with 1.2 x 50 s pulse 4 kV with 1.2 x 50 s pulse Max. 10 ms Max. 10 ms DO721
94

9.11.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DO722.7 7AC011.9 0AC171.9 Short Description 2003 digital output module, 8 relay outputs 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2.5 A 2003 stress relief attachment, 5 pcs., incl. mounting material Glass tube fuses 5 x 20 mm, 20 pcs., 3.15 A T / 250 V Image
Terminal blocks are included in the delivery.

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Amount EX270 CP430 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Type Switching Voltage Nominal at 2.5 A Maximum Maximum Voltage Relay - Relay Continuous Current per Output Module Maximum Switching Power (AC) Maximum Switching Power (DC) Power Consumption Protection Characteristics Short Circuit Protection Dynamic Characteristics Output Delay for Signal Changes from log 0 - log 1 log 1 - log 0 Fuse T 3.15A H / 250 V per output B&R 2003 I/O Module 8 isolated channels Relay / N.O. 240 VAC / 24 VDC 264 VAC / 125 VDC 460 VAC 2.5 A 20 A 625 VA 75 W at 30 VDC Max. 1.4 W 2 4 8 Yes DO722
Max. 10 ms Max. 10 ms
95

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Yes Yes DO722
96
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Mixed Modules
10. Digital Mixed Modules

Digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules. The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs.
10.2 Overview
Module Number of Inputs Nom. Input Voltage Number of Outputs Nom. Switching Voltage Continuous Current Connection DM435 8 24 VDC 8 24 VDC 0.5 A Terminal block DM438 8 24 VDC 8 24 VDC 0.5 A D-type connector DM465
24 VDC 16 24 VDC 0.5 A Terminal block
Table 69: Digital Mixed Module Overview
97
16
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Digital Mixed Modules 10.3 DM435

10.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DM435.7 7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 7TB722.9 7TB722.91 7TB733.9 7TB733.91 Short Description 2003 digital mixed module, 8 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 8 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 33 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 33 pin, cage clamps Image
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories" and "General Accessories").
Table 70: DM435 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Voltage and Output Monitoring (LED: OK) Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Electrical Isolation Outputs Number of Outputs Type 8 Highside Driver IC (Transistor) 8 Sink or source 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms Approx. 8 mA Input - PLC 4 8 Yes Supply voltage >18 V, outputs OK Max. 0.5 W Yes B&R 2003 I/O module DM435
Table 71: DM438 technical data
98

Product ID Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Overload Protection Continuous Short Circuit Current Internal Protective Circuit Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Electrical Isolation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width DM435 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A 12 A Yes Typ. 4 A Yes
Max. 450 s Max. 450 s Output - PLC
Table 71: DM438 technical data (cont.)
99
47 V

10.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DM438.72 Short Description 2003 digital mixed module, 8 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 8 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770. EX477, EX777 Voltage and Output Monitoring (LED: OK) Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Electrical Isolation Outputs Number of Outputs Type 8 Highside Driver IC (Transistor) 8 Sink or source 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms Approx. 8 mA Input - PLC 4 8 Yes Supply voltage >18 V, outputs OK Max. 0.5 W in preparation B&R 2003 I/O module DM438
100

Product ID Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Overload Protection Continuous Short Circuit Current Internal Protective Circuit Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Electrical Isolation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width DM438 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A 12 A Yes Typ. 4 A Yes
Max. 450 s Max. 450 s Output - PLC
101
47 V

10.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 7DM465.7 Short Description 2003 digital mixed module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 18 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 72 pin, cage clamps Image
7TB718.9 7TB718.91 7TB718:90-02 7TB718:91-02 7TB736.9 7TB736.91 7TB754.9 7TB754.91 7TB772.91

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount 1) CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 CP474, CP774 CP476 Voltage and Output Monitoring Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW HIGH Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Output 16 Sink 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 1 ms Approx. 4 mA Yes No 2 4 in preparation B&R 2003 I/O Module DM465
6 8 Yes (LED: OK) Supply voltage >18 V, outputs OK Max. 1.1 W
102

Product ID Outputs Number of Outputs Type Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Overload Protection Switching On after Overload Cutoff Continuous Short Circuit Current Internal Protective Circuit Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width 16 Highside Driver IC (Transistor) 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 8 A 12 A DM465
Automatically within seconds (depends on the module temperature) Typ. 4 A Yes 47 V Max. 650 s Max. 650 s Yes No

103
Yes
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Input Modules
11. Analog Input Modules

Measured values (voltages, currents) are converted into numerical values which can be processed by the PLC using analog input modules. In the PLC, analog data is always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the input module does not have to be considered when creating the application program. Each analog input module is assigned a status LED on the analog adapter module or CP interface. This LED indicates that the input module is working.
11.2 Overview
Module Number of Channels Input Signal Digital Converter Resolution Remark AI261 1 1 to 16 mV/V 24 bit One input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge AI294 4 0 to 4.5 V 13 bit Four inputs for potentiometer evaluation (e.g. displacement gauge)
Table 76: Analog input module overview

Module Number of Channels Input Signal Digital Converter Resolution AI351 1 10 V or 0 - 20 mA 12 Bit + sign AI354 4 10 V 12 Bit + sign AI774 4 0 - 20 mA 12 Bit
104
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Input Modules 11.3 AI261

11.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AI261.7 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 1 input for evaluation of a full-bridge strain gauge, 24 bit, screw-in module Image
Table 78: AI261 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Digital Converter Resolution Measured Value Preparation Calibration Linearization Conversion Measurement Range Input Current Operating Range / Measurement Sensor Bridge Voltage Short Circuit and Overload Protection Connection Sensor Type Internal Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No electrical isolation B&R 2003 screw-in module 1 24 Bit Using software, also during operation y=k*x+d To physical units (32 bit representation) 1 to 16 mV/V, Set using software <140 nA 75 to 5000 4.5 VDC 3 % / max. 60 mA Yes 4-line connection Isolated Max. 0.6 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface AI261
Table 79: AI261 technical data
105

11.3.3 General Information A full-bridge strain gauge can be used for the following tasks: Force gauge Elasticity gauge Load cell Pressure gauge Strain gauge Torque meter
106

11.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AI294.7 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, potentiometer displacement gauge, 13 bit, screw-in module Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Digital Converter Resolution Potentiometer Supply Upot Short Circuit and Overload Protection Input Current Measurement Sensor Measurement Range Sensor Type Internal Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No electrical isolation B&R 2003 screw-in module 4 13 Bit +4.5 V 3 % at 40 mA Yes <0.2 A 0.5 to 10 k , Potentiometer 0 V to Upot Isolated Max. 0.5 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface AI294
107

11.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AI351.70 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 1 input, +/- 10 V or 0 to 20 mA, 12 Bit + sign, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Signal Current Voltage Potentiometer Voltage Digital Converter Resolution Differential Input Resistance Voltage Current (load) Power Consumption Current/Voltage Measurement Potentiometer Operation Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No B&R 2003 screw-in module 1 differential input Can be set using switch 0 - 20 mA (also 20 mA) 10 V 9.94 V at max. 10 mA 12 Bit + sign 20 M 130 - 200 Max. 0.3 W Max. 0.7 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface AI351
108

11.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AI354.70 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit + sign, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Signal Digital Converter Resolution Differential Input Resistance Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No B&R 2003 screw-in module 4 differential inputs 10 V 12 Bit + sign 20 M Max. 0.5 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface AI354
109

11.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AI774.70 7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Signal Digital Converter Resolution Differential Input Resistance (load) Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No B&R 2003 screw-in module 4 differential inputs 0 - 20 mA (also 20 mA) 12 Bit 130 - 200 Max. 0.4 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface AI774
110
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Output Modules
12. Analog Output Modules

Analog output modules convert PLC internal number values into voltages or currents. The numbers to be converted must be in 16 bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independent of the resolution of the output module used. Each analog output module is assigned a status LED on the analog adapter module or CP interface. This LED indicates that the output module is working. 12.1.1 Overview
Module Number of Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution AO352 2 10 V or 0 - 20 mA 12 Bit
Table 88: Analog Output Module Overview
111
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Analog Output Modules 12.2 AO352

12.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AO352.70 7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02 Short Description 2003 analog output module, 2 outputs, +/- 10 V or 0-20 mA, 12 bit, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 89: AO352 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Output Signal Current Voltage Digital Converter Resolution Short Circuit Protection Power Consumption Current Output Load LSB Value (12 Bit) Voltage Output Load LSB Value (12 Bit) Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No Max. 10 mA 5.15 mV 0.8 % / LSB Max. 400 5.16 A 2.4 % / LSB B&R 2003 screw-in module 2 Can be set for each channel using a switch 0 - 20 mA 10 V 12 Bit Yes Max. 1.2 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface AO352
Table 90: AO352 technical data
112
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Temperature Modules
13. Temperature Modules

Temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed by the PLC using temperature modules. In the PLC, the number values are always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the temperature module does not have to be considered when creating the application program. For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1 steps. That means a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 C. The data format 0.1 C is supported by all temperature modules as standard. Additionally, a higher resolution can also be set for some temperature modules. Each temperature module is assigned a status LED on the analog adapter module or CP interface. This LED indicates that the temperature module is working.
13.2 Overview
Module Number of Channels Measurement Range Sensor AT324 4 -200 to +850 C KTY10-6 KTY84-130 PT100 PT1000 Yes 16 Bit AT352 2 -200 to +850 C PT100 AT664 4 -270 to +1,372 C FeCuNi NiCrN PtRhPt Yes 16 Bit Type J Type K Type S
Raw Value Evaluation Digital Converter Resolution
No 16 Bit
Table 91: Temperature Module Overview
113
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Temperature Modules 13.3 AT324

13.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AT324.70 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 4 temperature inputs (2-line connection), KTY10 -50 to +150 degrees C, KTY84 -40 to +300 degrees C, PT100 -200 to +850 degrees C, PT1000 -200 to +850 degrees C, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02
Table 92: AT324 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Input Type Number of Inputs Sensor KTY10-6 KTY84-130 PT100 PT1000 Wiring Conversion Method Digital Converter Resolution Input Amplification G=1 G=2 Reference Measurement Current Resistance Measurement Range when G = 1 when G = 2 Conversion Time per Channel Input Amplification Uniform Different B&R 2003 screw-in module Resistance measurement using 2-line procedure with constant current feed 4 -50 C to +150 C -40 C to +300 C -200 C to +850 C -200 C to +850 C 2-line Sigma Delta 16 Bit Can be set for each channel using software KTY10-6, KTY84-130, PT1000 PT100 5 k 0.1 % 200 A 5.22 % 1 to 4995 1 to 2497.5 in preparation AF101 adapter module, CP interface AT324
60 ms 190 ms
Table 93: AT324 technical data
114

Product ID Resolution in C KTY10-6 KTY84-130 PT100 PT1000 Resolution in when G = 1 when G = 2 Data Format Standardization KTY10-6 KTY84-130 PT100 PT1000 Standardized Value Range for Resistance Measurement when G = 1 when G = 2 Measurement Range Monitoring Open Inputs Broken Connection Range Exceeded (neg.) 1) Range Exceeded (pos.) General Error Common Mode Rejection DC 50 Hz Cross-talk between Channels Power Consumption Dynamic Characteristics Input Filter Type Cut-off Frequency Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No Low pass 1st order 150 Hz AT324 1 LSB = 0.01 C 1 LSB = 0.03 C 1 LSB = 0.15 C 1 LSB = 0.03 C 1 LSB = 76.29395 m 0.1 % 1 LSB = 38.14697 m 0.1 % INT16 Can be set per channel -50.00 C to +150.00 C -40.00 C to +300.00 C -200.0 C to +850.0 C -200.0 C to +850.0 C Can be set per channel 0.1 to 5000.0 0.05 to 5000.0
$7FFF $7FFF $8001 $7FFF $8000 >90 dB >150 dB Typ. 100 dB Max. 0.1 W
Table 93: AT324 technical data (cont.)

1) Only when measuring with a temperature sensor.
13.3.3 General Information The screw-in module AT324 is equipped with four input channels. It is used to evaluate measured values for PT100, PT1000, KTY10-6 and KTY84-130 temperature sensors. The module is installed on the adapter module AF101 or on the CP interface.
115

13.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AT352.70 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 2 inputs, PT100 (3-line connection), -200 to +850 C, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Sensor Type Connection Standard Digital Converter Resolution Measurement Range Small Measurement Range Resolution Large Measurement Range Resolution Measurement Update Conversion of Measurement Values to Temperature Values Measurement Current Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No B&R 2003 screw-in module 2 PT100 3-Line Connection IEC/EN 60751 16 Bit 2 ranges can be set -200.00 to +327.67 C 0.01 C -200.0 to +850.0 C 0.1 C 20 or 16.67 ms Automatic in the module 2 mA Max. 0.4 W in preparation AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface AT352
116

13.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AT664.70 Short Description 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, thermocouple, -270 to +1372 degrees C, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Sensor Digital Converter Resolution Measurement Range Sensor Temperature FeCuNi: Type J NiCrNi: Type K PtRhPt: Type S Terminal Temperature Raw Value Resolution Sensor Temperature Output Terminal Temperature Output Raw Value Output Conversion of Measurement Values to Temperature Values Terminal Temperature Compensation Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module No No B&R 2003 screw-in module 4 Thermocouples 16 Bit Depends on sensor type 1) -210 to +1,200 C -270 to +1,372 C -50 to +1,768 C -55 to +125 C 65534 V 0.1 C / LSB 0.1 C / LSB 2 V / LSB Automatic in the module Yes1) Max. 0.4 W Yes AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface AT664

1) Can be configured using software.
117

13.5.3 Scan Order The analog input module AT664 scans the inputs with a constant cycle time. 13.5.4 Sensor Type Selection Each module can be individually set to a certain sensor type. Automatic thermocouple calculation and raw value measurement can be combined without limitations.
118
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules
14. Other Modules

The group "Other Modules" includes combination modules, B&R 2003 expansions for the CP476 and motor modules.
14.2 Combination Modules

The combination module is a combination of digital input and output modules as well as analog input and output modules. The status of the digital inputs and outputs are indicated with status LEDs. 14.2.1 Overview
Module Digital Inputs Number of Inputs Nominal Input Voltage Digital Outputs Number of Outputs Switching Voltage Continuous Current Analog Inputs Number of Inputs Input Signal Resolution Analog Outputs Number of Outputs Output Signal Resolution 2 10 V 12 Bit 3 10 V 16 Bit 2 10 V / 0 -20 mA 12 Bit 3 10 V 16 Bit 8 24 VDC Max. 0.5 A 2 24 VDC Max. 0.5 A 8 24 VDC 3 24 VDC CM211 CM411
Table 98: Combination module overview
14.3 B&R 2003 Expansions for CP476

The CP476 now provides another expansion possibility on the far left of the system bus. Special expansion modules can be installed here. 14.3.1 Overview
Module ME010 ME020 Description 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts
Table 99: CP476 expansion overview
14.4 Motor Modules

DC motors are controlled with these modules. 14.4.1 Overview
Module MM424 MM432 Description 2003 motor module, four motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms), electronic over-current and over-temperature protection, status LEDs. 2003 motor bridge module, two motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30VDC @ 4A, peak current up to 8A (max. 2 s), integrated current closed loop controller, electronic overcurrent protection, 12 digital 24V inputs, can be optionally used for limit and position detection (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation), status LEDs.
Table 100: Motor module overview
119
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules 14.5 CM211

14.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 7CM211.7 Short Description 2003 combination module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 4 ms, sink, 3 one-channel or 2 two-channel counters or 2 incremental encoders, 20 kHz, 8 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, short-circuit protection, 2 inputs, 10 V / 0-20 mA, 12 bit, 2 outputs, 10 V, 12 bit, Order TB718 terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 18 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, cage clamps Image
7TB718.9 7TB718.91 7TB718:90-02 7TB718:91-02 7TB736.9 7TB736.91 7TB754.9 7TB754.91
Table 101: CM211 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount CP430, EX270, EX470, EX770 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX477, EX777 External Voltage Monitoring Electrical Isolation Analog - PLC Digital - PLC Digital - Analog Power Consumption Analog Inputs Input Type Number of Inputs Input Signal - Nominal Maximum Continuous Overload (without damage) Digital Converter Resolution Data Format Delivered to the Application Program Value Range Voltage +10V 0V -10 V Current 20 mA 0 mA Asymmetric 2 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be set for each channel with switch 15 V / 50 mA 12 Bit 16 Bit 2s complement 2 4 Yes (LED: OK), supply voltage >18 V No No No Max. 1.5 W in preparation B&R 2003 I/O module CM211
$7FFF $0000 $8001
$7FFF $0000
Table 102: CM211 technical data
120

Product ID Measurement Range Monitoring Open Inputs Range Exceeded (neg.) Voltage Current Range Exceeded (pos.) General Error Conversion Method Conversion Time Input Impedance in Signal Range for Voltage Input Input Impedance in Signal Range for Current Input (load) Input Filter Analog Outputs Number of Outputs Output Signal Load Digital Converter Resolution Data Format in Application Program Value Range +10 V 0V -10 V Conversion Time Load Impedance Short Circuit Protection Digital inputs Number of Inputs Type of Inputs Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Wiring Switching Threshold LOW Range HIGH Range Delay 0 to 1 with SW Filter without SW Filter Delay 1 to 0 with SW Filter without SW Filter Status Display Incremental Encoder Operation Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 8 3 x event counters, 3 x period measurement, 3 x gate measurement, 2 x incremental encoder ABR (+24 V), 1 x comparator 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 4 mA Sink <5 V >15 V <4 ms (default) <0.01 ms <4 ms (default) <0.01 ms 8 Green LEDs Square wave pulse 4-fold, cyclic counter 20 kHz 80 kHz 32 Bit Reference enable switch 1 Channel A1 Channel B1 Channel R1 Channel A2 Channel B2 Channel R2 Reference enable switch 2 2 10 V Max. 10 mA 12 Bit 16 Bit 2s complement $7FFF $0000 $8001 <4 ms for both channels 1 k Yes CM211 $7FFF $8001 $0000 $7FFF $8000 Successive approximation <4 ms for both channels, the channels are converted cyclically 1 M 95 - 200 Cut-off Frequency 500 Hz
Table 102: CM211 technical data (cont.)
121

Product ID Event Counter Operation Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Input 2 Input 3 Input 5 Period Measurement Signal Form Square wave pulse Evaluation Input Frequency Internal Counter Frequency External Counter Frequency Counter Size Input 3 Input 4 Input 7 Input 2 Input 5 Gate Measurement Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Internal Counter Frequency External Counter Frequency Counter Size Gate Pause Input 3 Input 4 Input 7 Input 2 Input 5 Comparator Comparator Output Reaction Time Evaluation Incremental Encoder Operation Event Counter Operation Electrical Isolation Input - Input Digital Outputs Number and type of outputs Rated Current Total Output Current Rated Voltage Switching Voltage Range Leakage Current (0 signal) Wiring Short Circuit Protection Overload Protection Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Status Display Electrical Isolation Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width 8 transistor outputs Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A 24 VDC 18 - 30 VDC 12 A Source Yes Yes 47 V <1.5 ms <1.5 ms 8 orange LEDs No CM211 Square wave pulse Each edge, cyclic counter 20 kHz 40 kHz 16 Bit Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Square wave pulse Positive edge - Positive edge 20 kHz 16 MHz, 4 MHz, 1 MHz, 250 kHz Max. 20 kHz 16 Bit Period channel 1 Period channel 2 Period channel 3 External counter frequency for channels 1 and 2 External counter frequency for channel 3 Square wave pulse Positive edge - Negative edge 10 kHz 16 MHz, 4 MHz, 1 MHz, 250 kHz Max. 20 kHz 16 Bit 50 s Gate channel 1 Gate channel 2 Gate channel 3 External counter frequency for channels 1 and 2 External counter frequency for channel 3 Output 1 <500 s Actual value comparison of the counter status of incremental encoder 1 Comparison of the counter status of counter 2 (window comparator) No
122
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules 14.6 CM411

14.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 7CM411.70-1 Short Description 2003 combination module, 3 inputs, 24 VDC, 50 kHz, sink, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 2 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, short circuit protection, 3 inputs, +/- 10 V, 16 bit, 3 outputs, +/- 10 V, 16 bit, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01
Table 103: CM411 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount 1) CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Voltage and Output Monitoring Electrical Isolation Analog - PLC Digital - PLC Digital - Analog Power Consumption Analog Inputs Number of Inputs Input Signal - Nominal Digital Converter Resolution Data Format Delivered to the Application Program Value Range +10 V -10 V Measurement Range Monitoring Open Inputs Range Exceeded (neg.) Range Exceeded (pos.) General Error Input Impedance in Signal Range 3 10 V 16 Bit 16 Bit 2s complement $7FFF $8001 $7FFF $8001 $7FFF $8000 1 M 1 2 Yes (LED: OK) Supply voltage >18 V, outputs OK No Yes Yes Max. 2.4 W in preparation B&R 2003 I/O module CM411
Table 104: CM411 technical data
123

Product ID Analog Outputs Number of Outputs Output Signal Load Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance Short Circuit Current Digital inputs Number and Type of Inputs Wiring Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Threshold LOW Range HIGH Range Input Delay Input Current at Nominal Voltage Incremental Encoder Operation Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Event Counter Operation Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Input 1 Input 2 Comparator Evaluation Comparator Output Reaction Time Electrical Isolation Input - Input Digital Outputs Number and type of outputs Rated Current Total Output Current Rated Voltage Switching Voltage Range Wiring Short Circuit Protection Overload Protection Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Electrical Isolation Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width 2 transistor outputs Max. 0.5 A Max. 1 A 24 VDC 18 - 30 VDC Source Yes Yes 59 V Max. 100 s Max. 100 s No 3 counter inputs Sink 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V >15 V Max. 3 s Approx. 6 mA Square wave pulse 4-fold, cyclic counter 50 kHz 200 kHz 32 Bit Channel A Channel B Ref Square wave pulse Each edge, cyclic counter 50 kHz 100 kHz 2 x 16 Bit Counter 1 Counter 2 Actual value comparison of the counter value during incremental encoder operation or of counter 2 during event counter operation (window comparator) Output 1 <100 s No 3 10 V Max. 10 mA 16 Bit 1 k 15 mA (individual sustained short-circuit protection) CM411

124
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules 14.7 ME010

14.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 7ME010.9 0MC111.9 0MC211.9 Short Description 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Peripherals PCMCIA Interface Standard Card Height Card Type Memory Size SRAM FlashPROM Status Display Mechanical Characteristics Module Width 20 mm 1 JEIDA V 4.0 or PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0 Max. 3 mm Memory cards Max. 4 MByte Max. 4 MByte 2 LEDs in preparation B&R 2003 Expansion for CP476 Can be installed on the far left of the system bus next to the CP476 0.35 W, without PCMCIA memory card ME010
125

14.7.3 General Information The CP476 now provides another expansion possibility on the far left of the system bus. Special expansion modules can be installed here. One of these is the ME010. The ME010 provides a PCMCIA slot for B&R memory cards. This expansion can be used to update the controller. Another possibility is using the PCMCIA cards as external recipe memory for these types of applications. In principle, it is possible to use memory cards as "normal" memory areas, but we strongly advice against this because the PCMCIA cards are not mechanically fixed in place and therefore are not vibration resistant. Access of memory cards is also very slow.
Diagram 28: B&R SYSTEM 2003 with ME010 expansion module
126
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules 14.8 ME020

14.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 7ME020.9 0MC111.9 0MC211.9 Short Description 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM Image
The IF671 interface module insert shown in the picture is not included in the delivery.
The following B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts can be operated with the ME020 module:
Model Number 3IF613.9 3IF621.9 3IF622.9 3IF661.9 3IF671.9 3IF672.9 3IF681.95 3IF681.96 Short Description Three RS232 interfaces One RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface One RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces One RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP Slave) One RS232 interface, one RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface One RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces One RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE2 connection (CHEAPERNET BNC socket) One RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE-T connection (Twisted Pair / RJ45 socket)
Table 108: Overview of B&R SYSTEMS 2005 interface module inserts

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Peripherals PCMCIA Interface Standard Card Height Card Type Memory Size SRAM FlashPROM Status Display Insert Slots Mechanical Characteristics Module Width 37 mm 1 JEIDA V 4.0 or PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0 Max. 3 mm Memory cards Max. 4 MByte Max. 4 MByte 2 LEDs 1 (for interface module inserts) in preparation B&R 2003 Expansion for CP476 Can be installed on the far left of the system bus next to the CP476 0.7 W, without PCMCIA memory card and without interface module insert ME020
127

14.8.3 General Information The CP476 now provides another expansion possibility on the far left of the system bus. Special expansion modules can be installed here. One of these is the ME020. The ME020 provides a PCMCIA slot for B&R memory cards. This expansion can be used to update the controller. Another possibility is using the PCMCIA cards as external recipe memory for these types of applications. In principle, it is possible to use memory cards as "normal" memory areas, but we strongly advice against this because the PCMCIA cards are not mechanically fixed in place and therefore are not vibration resistant. Access of memory cards is also very slow. Additionally, the ME020 provides a slot for B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts.
Diagram 29: B&R SYSTEM 2003 with ME020 expansion module
128
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules 14.9 MM424

14.9.1 Order Data
Model Number 7MM424.70-1 Short Description 2003 motor module, four motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms), electronic over-current and over-temperature protection, status LEDs, Order TB710 terminal block separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Image
7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01
Table 110: MM424 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount CP430, EX270 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777 Status Display Power Consumption Internal 24 VDC Supply Environmental Temperature during Operation Static Characteristics Number of Motor Bridges Type Electrical Isolation Bridge - PLC Bridge - Bridge Diagnosis Status Voltage Monitoring Switching Voltage/Supply Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Peak Current Starting Current 4 4 push-pull outputs Yes No Motor supply voltage >18 V 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 8 A To increase the output current, bridges can be switched in parallel. 5 A @ 200 ms 10 A @ 50 ms 4 8 LEDs 0.5 W 6.1 W 0 -50 C in preparation B&R 2003 I/O module MM424
Table 111: MM424 technical data
129
Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps

Product ID Switching On after Overload Cutoff Protection Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width Max. 400 s Max. 400 s MM424 Automatic within seconds (depends on the module temperature) Thermal cutoff Overcurrent cutoff
14.9.3 General Information The motor module MM424 is used for digital control of up to four DC motors with a nominal voltage of 24 VDC at a nominal current of max. 2 A. Unlike the motor bridge module MM432, the motor module MM424 can only digitally switch the 24 VDC supply voltage to the respective motor. The following possibilities are available for the motor: Switch through 24 VDC: Plus and minus open: Plus and minus connected: Motor is running Motor freewheeling or spinout Motor brakes itself
Change polarity of plus and minus: Motor changes direction
To increase the nominal current, outputs can be switched in parallel. The module is controlled digitally, comparable with a DM435. 14.9.4 Area of Use The motor module is mainly used for motor-drive combinations with or without a slip friction clutch. Any 24 VDC motor can be used if the specified currents are met. The module does not have a brake resistance integrated, so generator operation of a motor can cause the supply voltage to increase excessively. Therefore this type of operation must be prevented mechanically. The module is optimally suited as a very compact alternative to four reversing motor starter combinations in this performance range, especially for decentralized operation.
130
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Other Modules 14.10 MM432

14.10.1 Order Data
Model Number 7MM432.70-1 Short Description 2003 motor bridge module, two motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30 VDC @ 4A, peak current up to 8A (max. 2 s), integrated current closed loop controller, electronic overcurrent protection, 12 digital 24 V inputs, can be optionally used for limit and position detection (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation), status LEDs, Order terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 7TB718.9 7TB718.91 7TB718:90-02 7TB718:91-02
Table 112: MM432 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Amount EX270 CP430, EX470, EX770 CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 EX477, EX777 Status Display Power Consumption Environmental Temperature during Operation Standard Inputs Amount Wiring Nominal Voltage Max. Input Voltage Switching Threshold Low Range Switching Range High Range Input Impedance Input Current Input Delay Isolation Product ID ABR Inputs Amount Wiring Nominal Voltage Max. Input Voltage 6 Sink 24 VDC 30 VDC 6 Sink 24 VDC 30 VDC <5 V 5 - 15 V >15 V Approx. 5 k Approx. 5 mA @ 24 VDC Max. 1 ms No electrical isolation MM432 LEDs 2.5 W 0 to 55 C 1 2 4 in preparation B&R 2003 I/O Module MM432
131

Product ID Switching Threshold Low Range Switching Range High Range Input Impedance Input Current Max. Input Frequency Input Delay Operating Modes Isolation Motor Bridge - Power Section Amount Supply Voltage Max. Overvoltage Nominal Current Max. Current (electr. limited) PWM Frequency Protection Short Circuit Recognition Max. Short Circuit Current to Positive Voltage (lower bridge branch to positive voltage) Max. Short Circuit Current to Ground (upper bridge branch to ground) Max. Short Circuit Current between Motor Lines Motor Bridge - Current Measurement Amount Measurement Range Precision Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 single width 2 -0.1 to +8 A 50 mA 2 10 - 30 VDC 35 VDC 4A 8 A (max. 2 s) 16 kHz Ext. fuse 6.3 A (slow blow) required, short circuit protection to ground and positive voltage for each channel <2.5 ms 25 A 25% 50 A 25 A 25% MM432 <5 V 5 - 15 V >15 V Approx. 5 kW Approx. 5 mA @ 24 VDC 20 kHz Max. 6.5 s Control inputs, incremental (4-fold evaluation) No electrical isolation
Table 113: MM432 technical data (cont.)
14.10.3 General Information The motor bridge module MM432 is used to control two DC motors with a nominal voltage of 10 - 24 VDC at a nominal current up to 4 A. The module is also equipped with two ABR channels as well as six normal digital inputs for creating positioning tasks which are not too complex. Each motor is controlled with a full-bridge (H-bridge). Therefore the motors can be moved in both directions. Each bridge branch has its own supply voltage. The advantage of this is that two different motors with different voltages can be used. Each channel has current measurement, supply voltage measurement, and short circuit recognition to ground and to the positive supply voltage. Motor control takes place using a 16 kHz PWM signal and is therefore mostly noise-free. A local processor provides the required intelligence and is used for communication with the higher level CPU. It handles the preparation of the ABR inputs and normal digital input, the control of both motors (each with a PWM signal) and the analog measurements.
132
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Communication Modules
15. Communication Modules

15.1 Overview
Module IF311 IF321 IF361 IF371 Description 2003 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, screw-in module 2003 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module 2003 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, screw-in module 2003 interface module, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module
Table 114: Communication module overview
133
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Communication Modules 15.2 IF311

15.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 7IF311.7 2003 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, screw-in module Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
Table 115: IF311 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Electrical Isolation Interface - PLC Design Handshake Lines Baudrate Distance Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug RTS, CTS Max. 115.2 kBaud 2) 15 m at 19200 Baud No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes B&R 2003 screw-in module CP interface or Power Panel interface, slots 1, 2 and 3 Max. 0.5 W Max. 1.6 W with P120 / P121 1) IF311
Table 116: IF311 technical data

1) Integrated power supply on pin 4 of the RS232 interface for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120. 2) Can be configured using software.
134

15.3.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 7IF321.7 2003 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS Networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Electrical Isolation Interface - PLC Design Handshake Lines Baudrate Distance Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module RS485/RS422 1) Yes 9 pin D-type socket ---Max. 115.2 kBaud 1) 1200 m (without repeater) Yes 7/8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes B&R 2003 screw-in module CP interface or Power Panel interface, slots 1, 2 and 3 Max. 1.4 W IF321

135

15.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 7IF361.70-1 2003 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, screw-in module Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS Networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Controller RAM Transfer Protocol Design Electrical Isolation Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length < 100 m Bus Length < 200 m Bus Length < 400 m Bus Length < 1,000 m Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module RS485 ASIC SPC3 1.5 KByte PROFIBUS-DP 9 pin D-type socket Yes Yes 1,000 m 12 MBit/s 1.5 MBit/s 500 kBit/s 187.5 kBit/s Yes External T-connector in preparation B&R 2003 screw-in module CP interface or Power Panel interface, slots 1, 2 and 3 Max. 2.6 W IF361
136

15.5.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 7IF371.70-1 2003 interface module, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module Accessories 7AC911.9 Bus Connector, CAN Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Electrical Isolation Design Interface LEDs Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m Network Capable Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module CAN Interface - PLC 9 pin D-type plug RXD and TXD 1,000 m Max. 500 kBit/s Max. 250 kBit/s Max. 50 kBit/s Yes Yes B&R 2003 screw-in module CP Interface, slots 1, 2 and 3 Max. 2.5 W IF371
137
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Counter and Positioning Modules
16. Counter and Positioning Modules

16.1 Overview
Module NC161 Description 2003 encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, screw-in module
Table 123: Counter and positioning module overview
138
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Counter and Positioning Modules 16.2 NC161

16.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 7NC161.7 Short Description 2003 encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, screw-in module Image
Table 124: NC161 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Encoder Input General Information Incremental Encoder Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Phase Shift between Channel A and B Counter Size Inputs Input Level SSI Absolute Encoder Coding Word Size Baudrate Data Input Level Clock Output Level Max. Signal Delay Clock - Data Additional Inputs +24 VDC Reference Enable Switch Electrical Isolation Reference Pulse Electrical Isolation Encoder Supply Output Voltage Protection +5 VDC / max. 500 mA without external feed Short circuit and overload protection Connection using 15 pin D-type socket, incremental or SSI absolute encoder (both electrically isolated) Square wave pulse 4-fold Max. 100 kHz Max. 400 kHz 90 15 32 Bit A, A\, B, B\, R, R\ 5 V (differential input) Gray, Binary Max. 31 Bit 100 kBaud 5 V (differential signal) 5 V (differential signal) 2.5 s Connected using terminal block Yes Connected using 15 pin D-type socket (pin 10 and 11) Yes Yes B&R 2003 screw-in module AF101 adapter module, CP interface Power Panel interface 0.3 W + Iencoder * 5.4 V NC161
Table 125: NC161 technical data
139

Product ID External Supply Voltage Protection Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module NC161 +24 VDC /max. 300 mA Short circuit protection
Table 125: NC161 technical data (cont.)
16.2.3 General Information The NC161 is an encoder module with symmetrical incremental or absolute encoder evaluation. A 5 V encoder supply is available directly on the module. The 24 V encoder supply voltage must be connected externally. 16.2.4 Operating Modes The NC161 is used for single axis positioning with ramps in conjunction with the AO352 analog output module. 16.2.5 Special Functions Latches the counter value using the reference enable switch Enables use of a comparator output during incremental encoder operation.
140
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Accessories
17. Accessories
17.1 Overview
Model Number 7AC010.9 7AC011.9 7AC020.9 7TB722.9 7TB722.91 7TB733.9 7TB733.91 7TB736.9 7TB736.91 7TB754.9 7TB754.91 7TB772.91 Description 2003 bus cover, 5 pcs. 2003 stress relief attachment, 5 pcs., incl. mounting material 2003 bus cover, 1 pcs. 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps
2003 terminal block, 33 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 36 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 54 pin, cage clamps 2003 terminal block, 72 pin, cage clamps
Table 126: Accessory Overview
17.2 AC010 / AC020

17.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AC010.9 7AC020.9 Short Description 2003 bus cover, 5 pcs. 2003 bus cover, 1 pcs. Image
Table 127: AC010/AC020 order data
17.2.2 General Information If a module slot remains free, installing a bus cover on the first free slot is recommended. In this way, the last module can be protected from damage.
141
2003 terminal block, 33 pin, screw clamps
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Accessories 17.3 AC011

17.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AC011.9 Short Description 2003 stress relief attachment, 5 pcs., incl. mounting material Image
Table 128: AC011 order data
17.3.2 General Information The stress relief attachment is intended for used to wire the DO721 digital output module. It prevents the cabling placing too much stress on the 4 pin connectors. The stress relief attachment is mounted underneath the DO721. To do this, a threaded strip is inserted in the module rack and the stress relief attachment is fastened with two screws. The mounting material is contained in the delivery of the stress relief attachment. The wires running into the module are then secured to the stress relief attachment using cable ties. In this way, the connectors are freed from stress, and the integrity of the electrical wiring can be guaranteed.
Diagram 30: Mounting the stress relief attachment
142
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Accessories 17.4 TB722

17.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 7TB722.9 7TB722.91 Short Description 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps Image
TB722.9
TB722.91
Table 129: TB722 order data

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Wire Cross Section Cable Type Dimensions Height Width Depth TB722.9 33 mm 76 mm 52 mm TB722 22 Implemented as screw or cage clamps 5.08 mm 250 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.14 mm (AWG26) - 2.5 mm (AWG12) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) TB722.91 33 mm 76 mm 33 mm
Table 130: TB722 technical data

1) Take the respective limit data for the I/O modules into consideration!
17.4.3 General Information The terminal block TB722 is used to supply the digital inputs on the DM435 module. It is a 22 pin dual level terminal block with either screw clamps or cage clamps. The contacts on the front are connected together and the ones on the back are also connected together which creates a positive potential and a ground rail.
143

17.5.1 Order Data
TB733.9
TB733.91

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Fuse Wire Cross Section Cable Type Dimensions Height Width Depth TB733.9 48 mm 76 mm 52 mm TB733 33 All 11 terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected Implemented as screw or cage clamps 5.08 mm 250 V Max. 10 A / contact External fuse is required 0.14 mm (AWG26) - 2.5 mm (AWG12) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) TB733.91 48 mm 76 mm 44 mm

17.5.3 General Information The terminal block TB733 is used as an additional jumper terminal if the digital mixed module DM435 is operated using a 3-line connection. The TB733 is a 33 pin 3-level terminal block with either screw clamps or cage clamps. All terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected.
144

17.6.1 Order Data
TB736.9
TB736.91

Product ID Number of Pins Design Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Wire Cross Section Cable Type Dimensions Height Width Depth TB736.9 33 mm 76 mm 32 mm TB736 36 All 18 terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected Two 18 pin pin-connectors with corresponding contact socket as screw or cage clamp with ejection lever 3.5 mm 125 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.08 mm (AWG28) - 1.5 mm (AWG16) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) TB736.91 33 mm 76 mm 32 mm

17.6.3 General Information The terminal block TB736 is used to supply the digital inputs on the DM465 module. The TB736 consists of two 18 pin pinconnectors and corresponding socket connectors as screw or cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers. All terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected.
145

17.7.1 Order Data
TB754.9
TB754.91

Product ID Number of Pins Design Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Fuse Wire Cross Section Cable Type Dimensions Height Width Depth TB754 54 All 18 terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected Three 18 pin pin-connectors with corresponding contact socket as screw or cage clamp with ejection lever 3.5 mm 125 V Max. 12 A / contact External fuse is required 0.08 mm (AWG28) - 1.5 mm (AWG16) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) 50 mm 76 mm 32 mm

17.7.3 General Information The terminal block is used as an additional jumper terminal and is specially designed for 3-line connections, e.g. for the DM465 (3-line sensors). The TB754 consists of three18 pin pin-connectors and corresponding socket connectors as screw or cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers. All connections in a terminal row are electrically connected.
146
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Manuals 17.8 TB772

17.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 7TB772.91 Short Description 2003 terminal block, 72 pin, cage clamps Image

Product ID Number of Pins Design Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Fuse Wire Cross Section Cable Type Dimensions Height Width Depth TB772 72 All 18 terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected Two 36 pin pin-connectors and corresponding contact sockets as cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers 3.5 mm 50 V Max. 5 A / contact External fuse is required 0.5 mm - 1 mm Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) 48 mm 76 mm 34 mm

17.8.3 General Information The terminal block TB772 is used as an additional jumper terminal if the digital mixed module DM465 is operated using a 3-line connection. The TB772 consists of two 36 pin pin-connectors and corresponding socket connectors as cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers. All terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected.
18. Manuals
18.1 Overview
Model Number MASYS22003-0 MASYS22003-E Description B&R 2003 Users Manual, German B&R 2003 Users Manual, English
Table 139: Manual overview
147
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Manuals
148
1. Module Overview
The "Power" column contains a power value provided by the module or required by the module. In this way, a power balance can be calculated quickly and easily for a certain hardware configuration. The power supplied by the PS modules is shown with a "+" sign. The power required by a module is shown with a "-" sign. Add the positive and negative power values to calculate the power balance. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero.

Product ID ------AC240 AI350 AI375 AI775 AM050 AM051 AM055 AM374 AO350 AO775 AT350 AT450 AT660 BM150 BP150 BP150 BP151 BP151 BP152 BP152 BP155 BP155 CP260 Description 2005 positioning accessories, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC154 B&R 2005 Users Manual, German B&R 2005 Users Manual, English Battery module for two 9 V block cells, separate slot 8 voltage inputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit 4 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 4 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 4 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 4 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit 5 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 3 voltage outputs 10 V, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, resolution 12 bit 4 input 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, 4 outputs 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, signal switched in groups of 2 8 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 11 bit 4 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) 4 inputs for PT100 sensors (4-line) 8 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors with type K, raw value measurement Dummy module Backplane with 15 slots Backplane with 15 slots, backup battery Backplane with 12 slots Backplane with 12 slots, backup battery Backplane with 9 slots Backplane with 9 slots, backup battery Backplane with 6 slots Backplane with 6 slots, backup battery CPU with 2 insert slots, PCMCIA memory card Main -8.4 W Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion -5 W -5 W -5 W -6.5 W -6.5 W -7 W -6.5 W -5 W -5.5 W -4 W -4 W -6 W Backplane Power Model No. 0G2001.00-090 MASYS22005-0 MASYS22005-E 0AC240.9 3AI350.6 3AI375.6 3AI775.6 3AM050.6 3AM051.6 3AM055.6 3AM374.6 3AO350.6 3AO775.6 3AT350.6 3AT450.6 3AT660.6 3BM150.9 3BP150.4 3BP150.41 3BP151.4 3BP151.41 3BP152.4 3BP152.41 3BP155.4 3BP155.41 3CP260.60-1 Page 257 261 261 256 209 209 209 213 215 217 219 211 211 222 222 224 258 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 175
Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2005 sorted alphabetically according to product ID
149

Product ID DI450 DI475 DI476 DI477 DI486 DI695 DM455 DM476 DO479 DO480 DO650 DO690 DO750 DO760 EX150 EX250 EX350 IF050 IF060 IF260 IF613 IF621 IF622 IF661 IF671 IF672 IF681.95 IF681.96 IP161 Description 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 4 counter inputs, gate/period measurement 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: D-type connector 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: terminal block 16 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, 8 transistor outputs, 0 - 50 VDC, 1 A 16 dig. inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A, connection: D-type connector 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A 16 relay outputs, 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A 8 triac outputs, 120 VAC, 1 A 8 relay outputs, 230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A Remote I/O Master Remote I/O Slave, power supply insert I/O Master Controller, power supply insert Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1x RS232/TTY Interface module with insert slot for interface module inserts CPU or programmable interface module processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 insert slot Interface module for insert slot, 3 x RS232 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x RS485/RS422 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485 (PROFIBUS-DP slave) Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket) Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket) Programmable I/O Processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 x RS232, 1 x CAN, max. 12 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2,5 s switching delay, max. 12 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs, 10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs, 10 V, 12 Bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block Counter module, 2 32 bit counters, 100 kHz, 2 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit Positioning module, 3 axes, each axis has the following data: input for incremental encoder 5 V, input frequency 150 kHz, input for SSI absolute encoder, analog output 10 V, 12 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, trigger input 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC/24 VDC, 1 A Positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs 24 VDC, sink PROFIBUS network module Main Main Main Main Main Backplane Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main Power -2 W -1.5 W -1.5 W -1.5 W -1.2 W -1.5 W -3.5 W -2.5 W -1 W -2.5 W -4 W -1.5 W -3 W -4 W -5.5 W -1.6 W -1.5 W -7 W -1 W -3.5 W -1.2 W -1.5 W -1.25 W -2 W -2 W -1.8 W -2.4 W -1.65 W -14.5 W 1) -3.5 f. Pot. Model No. 3DI450.60-9 3DI475.6 3DI476.6 3DI477.6 3DI486.6 3DI695.6 3DM455.60-2 3DM476.6 3DO479.6 3DO480.6 3DO650.6 3DO690.6 3DO750.6 3DO760.6 3EX150.60-1 3EX250.60-1 3EX350.6 3IF050.6 3IF060.6 3IF260.60-1 3IF613.9 3IF621.9 3IF622.9 3IF661.9 3IF671.9 3IF672.9 3IF681.95 3IF681.96 3IP161.60-1 Page 189 191 191 193 194 195 185 206 197 197 199 201 199 203 169 171 173 227 229 177 230 231 233 235 236 238 240 242 179
NC150 NC154
Main and Expansion Main
-5 W -6 W
3NC150.6 3NC154.60-2
246 248
NC157 NW150
-6 W -7 W
3NC157.60-1 3NW150.60-1
252 244
Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2005 sorted alphabetically according to product ID (cont.)
150

Product ID PS465 PS477 PS692 PS694 PS792 PS794 TB162 TB170 TB170 TB170 TB170 XP152 Description Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave Power supply 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave Power supply 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Power supply 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave Power supply 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Single row terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Single row terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps Single row terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, screw clamps 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, cage clamps CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM -4 W Backplane Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Power +50 W +50 W +45 W +45 W +45 W +45 W Model No. 3PS465.9 3PS477.9 3PS692.9 3PS694.9 3PS792.9 3PS794.9 3TB162.9 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 3XP152.60-2 Page 163 163 165 165 167 167 259 260 260 260 260 182

1) 3.5 W is required for potentiometer voltage (if used externally).
1.2 Sorted according to Group

Product ID Description Module Rack BP150 BP150 BP151 BP151 BP152 BP152 BP155 BP155 Backplane with 15 slots Backplane with 15 slots, backup battery Backplane with 12 slots Backplane with 12 slots, backup battery Backplane with 9 slots Backplane with 9 slots, backup battery Backplane with 6 slots Backplane with 6 slots, backup battery Power Supply Modules PS465 PS477 PS692 PS694 PS792 PS794 Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave Power supply 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave Power supply 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Power supply 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave Power supply 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Bus Controller Modules EX150 EX250 EX350 Remote I/O Master Remote I/O Slave, power supply insert I/O Master Controller, power supply insert CPUs CP260 IF260 CPU with 2 insert slots, PCMCIA memory card CPU or programmable interface module processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 insert slot Main Main -8.4 W -3.5 W 3CP260.60-1 3IF260.60-1 175 177 Main -5.5 W -1.6 W -1.5 W 3EX150.60-1 3EX250.60-1 3EX350.6 169 171 173 Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion +50 W +50 W +45 W +45 W +45 W +45 W 3PS465.9 3PS477.9 3PS692.9 3PS694.9 3PS792.9 3PS794.9 163 163 165 165 167 167 3BP150.4 3BP150.41 3BP151.4 3BP151.41 3BP152.4 3BP152.41 3BP155.4 3BP155.41 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 Backplane Power Model No. Page
151

Product ID IP161 Description Programmable I/O Processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 x RS232, 1 x CAN, max. 12 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2,5 s switching delay, max. 12 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs, 10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs, 10 V, 12 Bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM Programmable Modules DM455 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, 8 transistor outputs, 0 - 50 VDC, 1 A Digital Input Modules DI450 DI475 DI476 DI477 DI486 DI695 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 4 counter inputs, gate/period measurement 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: D-type connector 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: terminal block 16 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay Digital Output Modules DO479 DO480 DO650 DO690 DO750 DO760 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A 16 relay outputs, 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A 8 triac outputs, 120 VAC, 1 A 8 relay outputs, 230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A Digital Mixed Modules DM476 16 dig. inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A, connection: D-type connector Analog Input Modules AI350 AI375 AI775 8 voltage inputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit Analog Output Modules AO350 AO775 8 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 11 bit Analog Mixed Modules AM050 AM051 AM055 AM374 4 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 4 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 4 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 4 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit 5 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 3 voltage outputs 10 V, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, resolution 12 bit 4 input 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, 4 outputs 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, signal switched in groups of 2 Temperature Modules AT350 4 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) Main and Expansion -4 W 3AT350.6 222 Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion -6.5 W -6.5 W -7 W -6.5 W 3AM050.6 3AM051.6 3AM055.6 3AM374.6 213 215 217 219 Main and Expansion Main and Expansion -5 W -5.5 W 3AO350.6 3AO775.6 211 211 Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion -5 W -5 W -5 W 3AI350.6 3AI375.6 3AI775.6 209 209 209 Main and Expansion -2.5 W 3DM476.6 206 Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion -1 W -2.5 W -4 W -1.5 W -3 W -4 W 3DO479.6 3DO480.6 3DO650.6 3DO690.6 3DO750.6 3DO760.6 197 197 199 201 199 203 Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Main and Expansion -2 W -1.5 W -1.5 W -1.5 W -1.2 W -1.5 W 3DI450.60-9 3DI475.6 3DI476.6 3DI477.6 3DI486.6 3DI695.6 189 191 191 193 194 195 Main and Expansion -3.5 W 3DM455.60-2 185 Backplane Main Power -14.5 W -3.5 f. Pot.
1)
Model No. 3IP161.60-1
Page 179
XP152
-4 W
3XP152.60-2
182
152

Product ID AT450 AT660 Description 4 inputs for PT100 sensors (4-line) 8 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors with type K, raw value measurement Communication Modules IF050 IF060 IF613 IF621 IF622 IF661 IF671 IF672 IF681.95 IF681.96 NW150 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1x RS232/TTY Interface module with insert slot for interface module inserts Interface module for insert slot, 3 x RS232 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x RS485/RS422 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485 (PROFIBUS-DP slave) Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket) Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket) PROFIBUS network module Counter and Positioning Modules NC150 NC154 Counter module, 2 32 bit counters, 100 kHz, 2 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit Positioning module, 3 axes, each axis has the following data: input for incremental encoder 5 V, input frequency 150 kHz, input for SSI absolute encoder, analog output 10 V, 12 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, trigger input 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC/24 VDC, 1 A Positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs 24 VDC, sink Accessories AC240 --BM150 TB162 TB170 TB170 TB170 TB170 Battery module for two 9 V block cells, separate slot 2005 positioning accessories, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC154 Dummy module Single row terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Single row terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps Single row terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, screw clamps 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, cage clamps Manuals ----B&R 2005 Users Manual, German B&R 2005 Users Manual, English MASYS22005-0 MASYS22005-E 261 261 Main and Expansion 0AC240.9 0G2001.00-090 3BM150.9 3TB162.9 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 256 257 258 259 260 260 260 260 Main and Expansion Main -5 W -6 W 3NC150.6 3NC154.60-2 246 248 Main Main Main -7 W -1 W -1.2 W -1.5 W -1.25 W -2 W -2 W -1.8 W -2.4 W -1.65 W -7 W 3IF050.6 3IF060.6 3IF613.9 3IF621.9 3IF622.9 3IF661.9 3IF671.9 3IF672.9 3IF681.95 3IF681.96 3NW150.60-1 227 229 230 231 233 235 236 238 240 242 244 Backplane Main and Expansion Main and Expansion Power -4 W -6 W Model No. 3AT450.6 3AT660.6 Page 222 224
NC157
-6 W
3NC157.60-1
252

1) 3.5 W is required for potentiometer voltage (if used externally).
153
2.1 Dimensions
The B&R 2005 system has both single and double width modules, depending on to the slots needed.
Width Single width Double width Slots 1 2
Table 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 Dimensions
The measurements given are installation measurements. The depth of the backplane must be added to the total depth of PLC.
Diagram 1: B&R SYSTEM 2005 module dimensions
2.2 Basic Module Construction

The following elements can be found behind the module door: Status LEDs Node Number Switch Reset Button Connection Plug
Openings are provided in the module door so that the LEDs can be read without the door being open. A label strip can be inserted on the inside of the module door which can be seen from the outside.
Diagram 2: B&R SYSTEM2005 module construction
154
B&R SYSTEM 2005 General Information 2.3 Module Rack

All System 2005 backplanes have the same construction. The only difference is the number of slots available:
Slots 6 9 12 15 Module Rack BP155 BP152 BP151 BP150 Length x 240 mm 360 mm 480 mm 600 mm
Table 4: B&R SYSTEM 2005 module slots
When installing backplanes, make sure to leave a min. of 20 mm on the left and right for the fastening levers.
Diagram 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 installation dimensions
2.4 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail which conforms to the standard DIN EN 50022 is required to mount the PLC. The mounting rail is electrically connected to the back wall of the cabinet. Follow the manufacturers installation instructions!
Diagram 4: Mounting Rail
155
B&R SYSTEM 2005 General Information 2.5 Installation

The installation is only allowed to be carried out by a qualified personnel! The installation of the PLC takes place in the following order: Install mounting rail Install the backplane Install the PLC modules
2.5.1 Installing the Backplane The following steps are to be taken in order to secure the backplane on the mounting rail: Set all fastening levers to the "OPEN" position Hang the backplane on the desired position on the mounting rail Set all fastening levers to the "CLOSE" position
Removing backplane modules is done in the reverse order!
Diagram 6: Installing the backplane on the mounting rail
156

2.5.2 Install the PLC modules After the backplane is secured to the mounting rail, the PLC modules can be inserted into the corresponding slots on the backplane. A module is to be installed in the following order: (1) Hang the module in the corresponding module slot using the module support hook.
Diagram 7: Install module
(2) Tip the module back until the upper fastening clip clicks onto the PLC module. Chapter 3 B&R SYSTEM 2005
Diagram 8: Tip the module back
The PLC modules are removed in the opposite order. Pressing the release lever (1) unclips the lock pin. The module can then be tipped forwards (2) and removed from the backplane (3).
Diagram 9: Removing a module
157
B&R SYSTEM 2005 General Information 2.6 Terminal Block TB170

Single row terminal blocks, which can be removed with two ejection levers, are used to wire most modules. They are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps.
Diagram 10: Screw clamps
Diagram 11: Cage clamps
2.6.1 Cabling Terminal Blocks All cables (cable bundles) are to be run down from the terminal blocks.
A cable tie is used to relieve strain on the terminal block and is to be attached to the slots provided on the module housing.
Diagram 13: Stress relief using cable ties
158
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Module Rack 2.7 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity
The following values are valid for all B&R SYSTEM 2005 modules if no other values are listed in the "Technical Data" section.
Environmental Temperature during Operation Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 5 to 95 %, non-condensing
Table 5: Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity
3. Module Rack
Backplane modules are installed on a standard mounting rail. They are used for installing controller components (CPU, I/O modules, power supply modules, system modules, etc.). The I/O bus, system bus and the supply lines are provided on the backplanes. Backplanes are available with 6, 9, 12 or 15 slots for the B&R SYSTEM 2005. You are recommended to use the smallest backplane so that as few slots as possible remain free! Dummy module must be installed in all free slots. Chapter 3 B&R SYSTEM 2005 The backplane modules 3BP15x.41 are equipped with a backup battery. This lithium battery is used to buffer data centrally on the 2005 PLC (e.g. XP152 data and real time clock). The module address is determined by the slot (slot coding). Module addressing begins with slot 3, which has address 1. For PLC systems with an operating system older than version 1.10, module addressing for system modules begins with address 0 (numbering is different for system and I/O modules).
Diagram 14: Module rack general information
The following modules can be used depending on whether the backplane is used as a main backplane or an expansion backplane:
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 : : 15 System or I/O module System or I/O module : : System or I/O module Main Backplane Power supply with expansion slot or any other power supply System or I/O module I/O module I/O module I/O module I/O module : : I/O module Expansion Backplane Power Supply: with expansion slot or with expansion slave
Table 6: Module overview for main and expansion backplanes
159
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Module Rack 3.2 BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP155
3.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Module Rack 3BP150.4 3BP151.4 3BP152.4 3BP155.4 3BP150.41 3BP151.41 3BP152.41 3BP155.41 2005 backplane, 15 slots 2005 backplane, 12 slots 2005 backplane, 9 slots 2005 backplane, 6 slots 2005 backplane, 15 slots, with backup battery 2005 backplane, 12 slots, with backup battery 2005 backplane, 9 slots, with backup battery 2005 backplane, 6 slots, with backup battery Accessories 0AC201.9 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell Image
Backup battery is not included in the delivery.
Table 7: BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP155 order data

Product ID C-UL-US Listed Number of Slots Dimensions 1) Height Width Depth Number of Modules that can be Inserted On the Main Backplane 1 Power Supply + ... On Expansion Backplane 1 Power Supply + ... Backup Battery Type Storage Time (not installed) Storage Temperature Backplane Without Lithium Batt. Backplane With Lithium Batt. Lithium Batt. (not installed) -20 to +70 C 15 165 mm 600 mm 23 mm 12 165 mm 480 mm 23 mm BP150 BP151 Yes 9 165 mm 360 mm 23 mm 6 165 mm 240 mm 23 mm BP152 BP155
13 system or I/O modules 13 I/O modules
Only backplanes with model no. 3BP15x.41 Lithium battery - 3 V / 950 mAh Max. 3 years at 30 C
-20 to +60 C
-20 to +60 C
Table 8: BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP 155 technical data
160
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Power Supply Modules
4. Power Supply Modules

Power supply modules create the voltages required internally by the PLC from the input voltage (24 VDC, 120 VAC or 230 VAC). Each main and expansion unit requires its own power supply module. The power supply module always has to be operated in the far left slot of the backplane. All power supply modules require two slots. When configuring a system, make sure that the power consumption of all modules installed is not larger than the output power of the power supply module. If a power supply cannot provide the power required by the modules, install the I/O modules on an expansion backplane.
4.2 Safety Features

Power supply modules are equipped with an internal current limit (short circuit protection) and have connections for an external buffer voltage (AC240 battery module). The current limit also becomes active if the modules installed require more power than the power supply can deliver; in this case, the CPU is reset without a power failure having occurred. A fuse protects the module against overloads and reverse polarity. The fuse is behind the module door. The function of the PLC can be monitored with a ready relay. The ready relay is set in normal operation and opens if an error which causes the PLC to fail occurs. The ready relay is normally connected to the E-STOP circuit.
4.3 Special Functions

Some power supply modules also have special functions, e.g. a remote I/O slave, an expansion slave or an expansion slot.
4.4 Expansion Slot

Power supply modules PS465, PS694 and PS794 have an expansion slot. For example, the XP152 CPU can be placed in this expansion slot.
4.5 Expansion Slave (local expansion)

An expansion slave is built into power supply modules PS477, PS692 and PS792 which allows another I/O bus segment to be started. With local expansion, the expansion unit (expansion slave) is installed near the main unit (expansion master), usually in the same switching cabinet. Up to four expansion slaves can be operated on an expansion master.
4.6 Remote Slave (remote expansion)

The remote slave EX250 can be inserted in the expansion slot on power supply modules PS465, PS694 and PS794. The remote slave can be connected to the remote master bus cable on 2005 or 2010 systems. With remote expansion (remote I/O), the expansion unit (remote slave) can be up to 1200 m from the main unit (remote master). With a repeater, the network can be extended even further. Without a repeater, a maximum of 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master.
161
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Power Supply Modules 4.7 Overview

The distinguishing features relevant for power supply modules are input voltage, output power and special functions.
Power Supply Module Input Voltage Output Power Special Function Expansion Slave Expansion Slot Fuse (slow-blow) PS465 24 VDC 50 W No Yes 5 A / 250 V PS477 24 VDC 50 W Yes No 5 A / 250 V
Table 9: PS465 / PS477 overview
Power Supply Module Input Voltage Output Power Special Function Expansion Slave Expansion Slot Fuse (slow-blow)
PS692 120 VAC 45 W Yes No 1.6 A / 250 V
PS694 120 VAC 45 W No Yes 1.6 A / 250 V
Power Supply Module Input Voltage Output Power Special Function Expansion Slave Expansion Slot Fuse (slow-blow)
PS792 230 VAC 45 W Yes No 1.6 A / 250 V
PS794 230 VAC 45 W No Yes 1.6 A / 250 V
162
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Power Supply Modules 4.8 PS465 / PS477

4.8.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Power Supply Modules 3PS465.9 3PS477.9 2005 power supply module, 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot 2005 power supply module, 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave Accessories 0G0010.00-090 0G0012.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Image
Table 12: PS465 / PS477 order data
The following modules can be operated in an expansion slot:

Model Number 3EX250.60-1 3EX350.6 3XP152.60-2 Short Description Remote I/O slave, power supply insert I/O master controller, power supply insert CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM See Section Bus Controller Modules Bus Controller Modules CPUs
Table 13: Overview of the modules that can be operated in an expansion slot
The EX150 module is used as a remote I/O master:

Model Number 3EX150.60-1 Short Description Remote I/O master See Section Bus Controller Modules
Table 14: Remote I/O Master EX150

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Yes B&R 2005 power supply module, double width 1+2 1+2 PS465 PS477
Table 15: PS465 / PS477 technical data
163

Product ID External Back-up Capacitor for Single Phase Bridge for Three Phase Bridge Output Power Current Requirements Input Capacitance Fuse Peripherals Expansion Slave Expansion Slot External RAM Buffering by Supplying Status Display READY Relay Design Switching Voltage Switching Current Protection No Yes 12 V (min. 8 V / max. 30 V) LEDs Normally open Max. 30 VDC Max. 3 A 370 V transient voltage protection diode to ground Yes No PS465 10,000 F 6,000 F Max. 50 W Max. 3.5 A 500 F 6.3 A (slow-blow) / 250 V PS477
Table 15: PS465 / PS477 technical data (cont.)
164

4.9.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Power Supply Modules 3PS692.9 3PS694.9 2005 power supply module, 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave 2005 power supply module, 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Accessories 0G0010.00-090 0G0012.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Image

Model Number 3EX250.60-1 3EX350.6 3XP152.60-2 Short Description Remote I/O Slave, power supply insert I/O Master Controller, power supply insert CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM Bus Controller Modules Bus Controller Modules CPUs See Section

Model Number 3EX150.60-1 Short Description Remote I/O Master See Section Bus Controller Modules

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Voltage Frequency 92 VAC 120 VAC 133 VAC 47 to 63 Hz Yes B&R 2005 power supply module, double width 1+2 1+2 PS692 PS694
165

Product ID Overvoltage Peak Value Half-peak Duration Output Power Current Requirements Fuse Peripherals Expansion Slave Expansion Slot External RAM Buffering by Supplying Status Display READY Relay Design Switching Voltage Switching Current Protection Yes No 12 V (min. 8 V / max. 30 V) LEDs Normally open Max. 270 VAC / 30 VDC Max. 3 A 780 V VDR internal No Yes PS692 <500 V <10 ms (non-periodic) Max. 45 W Max. 0.8 A 1.6 A (slow-blow) / 250 V PS694
166

4.10.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Power Supply Modules 3PS792.9 3PS794.9 2005 power supply module, 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave 2005 power supply module, 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Accessories 0G0010.00-090 0G0012.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Image

Model Number 3EX250.60-1 3EX350.6 XP152.60-2 Short Description Remote I/O slave, power supply insert I/O master controller, power supply insert CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM See Section Bus Controller Modules Bus Controller Modules CPUs
The EX150 module is use as a remote I/O master:


Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Voltage Frequency 187 VAC 230 VAC 265 VAC 47 to 63 Hz Yes B&R 2005 power supply module, double width 1+2 1+2 PS792 PS794
167

Product ID Overvoltage Peak Value Half-peak Duration Output Power Current Requirements Fuse Peripherals Expansion Slave Expansion Slot External RAM Buffering by Supplying Status Display READY Relay Design Switching Voltage Switching Current Protection Yes No 12 V (min. 8 V / max. 30 V) LEDs Normally open Max. 270 VAC / 30 VDC Max. 3 A 780 V VDR internal No Yes PS792 <500 V <10 ms (non-periodic) Max. 45 W Max. 0.4 A 1.6 A (slow-blow) / 250 V PS794
Table 23: PS792 / PS794 technical data (cont.)
168

5.1 Overview
Module EX150 EX250 EX350 Description 2005 remote I/O master, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus 2005 remote I/O slave controller, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus, power supply module insert 2005 local I/O master controller, controls I/O modules on up to four expansion backplanes, power supply module insert
Table 24: Bus Controller Module Overview
5.2 EX150
5.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Remote I/O Master 3EX150.60-1 2005 remote I/O master, electrically isolated RS485 interface, to connect to a remote I/O bus Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
Additional accessories see sections "Accessories" and "Manuals".

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Consumption Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs Number Switch Yes Setting the slave address Yes B&R 2005 system module, single width Yes No Max. 5.5 W EX150
169

Product ID Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 100 kBit/s 181 kBit/s 500 kBit/s 1000 kBit/s 2000 kBit/s Remote I/O Bus Access Procedure Number of Remote I/O Masters Number of Slaves Topology Connection to the Bus Transfer Media Termination Resistance RS485 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m Max. 200 m Max. 100 m Master-slave principle Max. 8 Max. 31 (without repeater) Physical bus Direct Shielded, twisted pair External EX150
5.2.3 General Information Remote Master The remote master is a system module that can be used to connect I/O modules to the CPU over long distances. The remote master and up to 31 remote slaves are connected with a bus cable. Remote Slave The EX250 bus controller is used as remote slave. The bus controller is a power supply insert.
170

5.3.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Remote I/O Slave 3EX250.60-1 2005 remote I/O slave controller, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus, power supply module insert Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product IDEX250
General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs Number Switch Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 100 kBit/s 181 kBit/s 500 kBit/s 1000 kBit/s 2000 kBit/s Remote I/O Bus Access Procedure Topology Connection to the Bus Master-slave principle Physical bus Direct RS485 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m Max. 200 m Max. 100 m Yes Setting the slave address in preparation Insert for power supplies PS465, PS694 or PS794 Max. 1.6 W
171

General Information Transfer Media Termination Resistance Baudrate Shielded, twisted pair External Automatic baudrate recognition
Table 29: EX250 technical data (cont.)
5.3.2 General Information A B&R SYSTEM 2005 controller is integrated into a remote I/O bus as slave station using the EX250 bus controller. A bus cable is used to connect the remote master station and up to 31 remote slave stations. Each B&R SYSTEM 2005 slave begins a new I/O bus on which a maximum of 13 modules can be addressed. The EX250 bus controller is operated in an expansion slot on power supply modules PS465, PS694 or PS794. The module is equipped with status LEDs, two number switches for slave address settings and a connector for an RS485 interface.
Diagram 15: EX250 bus controller
172

5.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Local I/O Master Controller 3EX350.6 2005 local I/O master controller, controls I/O modules on up to four expansion backplanes, power supply module insert Accessories 0G0010.00-090 0G0012.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Processor Section Data Buffering Number of Expansion Backplanes Number of I/O Data Points Digital Analog Communication Interface Interface Electrical Isolation Access Procedure Expansion Master No B&R local I/O bus expansion (secure) Battery buffered via B&R 2005 backplane Max. 4 Refers to B&R 2005 main and expansion systems 1024 inputs / 1024 outputs 512 inputs / 512 outputs Yes Insert for power supplies PS465, PS694 or PS794 Max. 1.5 W EX350
5.4.3 General Information Using the EX350 I/O master controller allows up to four expansion backplanes (including all I/O modules) to be operated with the CPUs CP260, IF260 and IP161. The I/O master controller is operated in the expansion slot of a PS465, PS694 or PS794 power supply module. The I/O modules on the main backplane are handled by the CPU. The EX350 module supports the CPU when processing I/O module data on the expansion backplane.
173
6. CPUs
6.1 Programming
Automation Studio Automation Basic (previously PL2000) ANSI C IEC 1131 Ladder Diagram (LAD) IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) IEC 1131 Structured Text (ST) IEC 1131 Instruction List (IL) PG2000 Instruction List (IL) Ladder Diagram (LAD) PL2000 High Level Language (structured text)
Table 32: CPU programming
6.2 Buffering
Buffering data and guaranteeing that the real-time clock operates during power failures is handled centrally by the backplane or the AC240 battery module.
6.3 Programming the FlashPROM

Programming and deleting the built-in FlashPROM memory takes place using the programming system.
6.4 Overview
Module CP260 IF260 IP161 Description 2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface 2005 CPU or progr. interface processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts 2005 programmable I/O processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 12 dig. inputs 24 VDC, sink, max. 12 dig. outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs +/-10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs +/-10 V, 12 bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block, Order terminal blocks separately! 2005 CPU, 118 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, power supply module insert
XP152
174
B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPUs 6.5 CP260

6.5.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU 3CP260.60-1 2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface Memory Cards 0MC111.9 0MC211.9 PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
Table 34: CP260 order data
The following interface module inserts can be used with the CP260:
Table 35: B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Consumption at 5 V at 24 V (fan) Processor Section Instruction Cycle Time Data and Program Code Cache 0.2 sec 2 x 256 Byte Yes B&R 2005 CPU, double width 3+4 ---Max. 6.1 W without memory cards and without interface modules Max. 2.3 W CP260
Table 36: CP260 technical data
175

Product ID Standard Memory RAM System RAM User RAM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery in 2005 Backplane with Battery Module AC240 Buffering with NiMH Rechargeable Battery Battery Monitoring Peripherals PCMCIA Interface Standard Card Height Card Type Memory Size SRAM FlashPROM Real-time Clock Resolution Reset Button Status Display Insert Slots Standard Communication Interface Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud Max. 64 kBaud 1 JEIDA V 4.0 or PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0 Max. 3 mm Memory Cards Max. 16 MByte Max. 16 MByte Nonvolatile 1s Yes LEDs 2 (for interface module inserts) CP260 4 MByte DRAM 174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 512 KByte FlashPROM Min. 4 years Min. 2.5 years Min. 2 months Yes
Table 36: CP260 technical data (cont.)
6.5.3 General Information The CPU is inserted in the main rack directly next to the power supply module. It requires two slots. Only the status LEDs can be seen with the module door closed. Behind the module door, you will find the operational and display elements, the two insertion slots for interface modules, the PCMCIA interface and the RS232 interface.
Diagram 16: CP260 operational elements and display elements
176
B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPUs 6.6 IF260

6.6.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU or Programmable Interface Processor 3IF260.60-1 2005 CPU or progr. interface processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
The interface modules listed below can be used with the IF260 module. An interface module with an RS232 interface is required for a direct online connection.
Table 38: B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot 3 4 Power Consumption Processor Section Instruction Cycle Time 0.4 s Yes B&R 2005 system module, single width CPU operation Programmable interface processor operation Max. 3.5 W IF260
177

Product ID Standard Memory System RAM User RAM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery in 2005 Backplane with Battery Module AC240 with NiMH Rechargeable Battery Battery Monitoring Peripherals Real-time Clock Resolution Insert Slots Reset Button Status Display Nonvolatile 1s 1 (for interface module inserts) Yes 5 Status LEDs IF260 174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 1536 KByte FlashPROM Min. 4 years Min. 2.5 years Min. 2 months Yes, when operated as main CPU
Table 39: IF260 technical data (cont.)
6.6.3 General Information The IF260 module can be used either as CPU or as programmable interface processor. The module recognizes the correct operating mode from the slot used (slot 3 -> CPU module). The IF260 module is equipped with a CPU section and an insert slot for interface modules. The operational elements, display elements and an insert slot for an interface module are behind the module door.
Diagram 17: IF260 operational elements and display elements
178
B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPUs 6.7 IP161

6.7.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Programmable I/O Processor 3IP161.60-1 2005 programmable I/O processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 12 dig. inputs 24 VDC, sink, max. 12 dig. outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs +/- 10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block, Order terminal blocks separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Accessories 0G0001.00-090 7AC911.9 0AC912.9 0AC913.92 0AC961.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Bus Connector, CAN Bus Adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Bus Adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable Accessories, Bus Adapter (CAN, RS232) Image
3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02
Table 40: IP161 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot 3 4 Power Consumption Digital Section Analog Section Processor Section Instruction Cycle Time Standard Memory System RAM User RAM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery in 2005 Backplane with Battery Module AC240 Battery Monitoring Peripherals Real-time Clock Resolution Reset Button Status Display Nonvolatile during CPU operation (buffered externally) 1s Yes 4 Status LEDs, 4 Interface LEDs 0.4 s 174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 1.5 MByte FlashPROM Min. 4 years Min. 2 years Yes, when operated as main CPU in preparation B&R 2005 system module, double width CPU operation (slots 3+4 used) Programmable I/O processor operation Max. 6.5 W Max. 8 W + 3.5 W for potentiometer voltage (if used externally) IP161
Table 41: IP161 technical data
179

Product ID Standard Communication Interfaces Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate Application Interface IF2 Electrical Isolation Design Station Number Distance Max. Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m Application Interface IF3 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate Potentiometer Voltage Outputs Number and Type of Potentiometer Voltages Electrical Isolation to PLC Output Current Maximum Output Power Analog Inputs Number of Inputs Input Signal, Nominal Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Static Dynamic Isolation Voltage between Input and Bus Analog Outputs Number of Outputs Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance Output Response when Power Supply is Switched On/Off Isolation Voltage between Output and Bus Repeat Precision at a Certain Temperature after Specified Stabilizing Time Digital inputs Number of Inputs Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Wiring Limits 0-Signal UL 0-Signal IL Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Power Consumption (external) Per Group at 24 V (no load) Per Digital Input at 24 V Interrupt Capable Up to 12 Configuration as input or output takes place in groups of two using software +24 VDC Max. 200 kHz (symmetrical square wave) Sink 5 V 2 mA 2.5 s 2.5 s 0.48 W 0.24 W Yes Parameters can be set using LTX functions - each digital input can trigger an IRQ ATTENTION: Handling takes place using an exception task 50 V 6 voltage outputs 10 V 12 Bit 1 k An enable relay is switched on at a defined value of 0 V Basic setting = short circuit on the output terminals using relay contact 50 V 2 LSB (noise at constant temperature in 24 hours) 6 10 V 14 Bit 2 M 3 kW / 10 nF 50 V 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block Yes 80 mA (simultaneously) 1.6 W RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud Max. 115.2 kBaud CAN Yes 9 pin D-type plug Can be set using two node number switches Max. 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug, bus adapter required Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud Max. 115.2 kBaud IP161
Isolation Voltage between Input and Bus Digital Outputs Number and Type of Outputs
Up to 12 transistor outputs (Push/Pull) Configuration as input or output takes place in groups of two using software
Table 41: IP161 technical data (cont.)
180

Product ID Rated Current (1-Signal) Rated Voltage Switching Voltage Range Wiring Power Consumption per Group (external) Type of External Protective Circuit Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Total Output Current Isolation Voltage between Output and Bus IP161 100 mA +24 VDC +12 to +35 VDC Sink or source 20 mA + load current for the outputs For inductive loads, clamping diodes can also be connected between the output and the group supply (24 VDC and GND) 2 s for resistive loads 2 s for resistive loads Max. 400 mA/group (static) 50 V
Table 41: IP161 technical data (cont.)
6.7.3 General Information The programmable I/O processor IP161 has a CPU section, two interfaces, digital and analog I/O. Two features of the IP161 are the interrupt capable digital inputs and the fact that it can be used as intelligent I/O processor and also as CPU. The module recognizes the correct operating mode from the slot used. The module is usually used as an I/O processor, to reduce the load on the CPU. Chapter 3 B&R SYSTEM 2005 The module has three I/O groups, a reset button, status LEDs, two HEX number switches for the CAN bus station number and the connectors for two RS232 interfaces and a CAN interface.
Diagram 18: IP161 operational elements and display elements
181
B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPUs 6.8 XP152

6.8.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU 3XP152.60-2 2005 CPU, 118 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, power supply module insert Accessories 0G0001.00-090 7AC911.9 0AC912.9 0AC913.92 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Bus connector, CAN Bus adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable Image
Table 42: XP152 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Slot Power Consumption Processor Section Instruction Cycle Time SRAM System RAM User RAM FlashPROM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery in 2005 Backplane with Battery Module AC240 Battery Monitoring Peripherals Real-time Clock Resolution Reset Button Status Display Standard Communication Interfaces Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud Max. 64 kBaud Nonvolatile (external buffering) 1s Yes LEDs 0.8 s 138 KByte 118 KByte 512 KByte 512 KByte Min. 4 years Min. 2 years Yes, when operated as main CPU (starting with Rev. 12.00) Yes B&R 2005 CPU Insert for power supplies PS465, PS694 or PS794 Max. 4 W XP152
Table 43: XP152 technical data
182

Product ID Application Interface IF2 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Max. Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m XP152 CAN Yes 9 pin D-type plug Max. 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s
Table 43: XP152 technical data (cont.)
6.8.3 General Information The XP152 module is a CPU insert for power supply modules. This means that the CPU does not require its own slot. The module is equipped with a RESET button, status LEDs, two HEX number switches for the CAN bus station number and the connectors for an RS232 and a CAN interface. Optionally, the XP152 module can be operated as intelligent CAN bus processor together with a CPU (e.g. CP260). In operating mode, the XP152 cannot access local modules on the 2005 unit. It is controlled by the CPU, collects data from the CAN stations (e.g. I/O) and provides this data to the CPU.
Diagram 19: XP152 operational elements and display elements
183
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Programmable Modules
7. Programmable Modules
7.1 Overview
Module DM455 Description 2005 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 ms, sink, 8 transistor outputs, 0 to 5 VDC, 1 A, Order terminal blocks separately!
Table 44: Programmable module overview
184
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Programmable Modules 7.2 DM455

7.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DM455.60-2 Short Description 2005 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, sink, 8 transistor outputs, 0 to 50 VDC, 1 A, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02
Terminal block is not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Consumption Inputs Number of Inputs Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Frequency Wiring Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Applications Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Output Outputs Number of Outputs Design 8 Transistor 8 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 5 mA Max. 100 kHz, decisively limited by the software Sink <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V Encoder evaluation, signal measurement, high-speed signal processing Max. 2.5 s Max. 2.5 s Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) Yes B&R 2005 I/O module Yes Yes Max. 3.5 W DM455
185

Product ID Supply Voltage Supply Voltage Range + to ground - to ground Product ID Continuous Current per Output Push, Pull, Push/Pull Motor Operation Protective Circuit Internal External Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Switching Frequency (resistive load) Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width DM455 0 - 50 VDC Max. +70 VDC Max. -70 VDC DM455 Max. 1 A Max. 1 A per winding Yes Generally required (fuse) Max. 7 s Max. 7 s Max. 100 kHz, decisively limited by the software Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler)
186

8.2 Input Filter

Diagram 20: Input filter for digital input modules
187
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Digital Input Modules 8.3 Sink/Source Connections

Most 24 VDC B&R SYSTEM 2005 input modules can be either wired as sink or source circuits. The inputs on a module are normally separated in electrically isolated groups of four inputs, therefore each group can be wired differently. In a sink circuit (current consumer for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group is connected to signal ground and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to 24 V.
Diagram 21: Sink/Source Connections
In a source circuit (current supplier for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group is connected to +24 VDC and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to signal ground.
8.4 Overview
Module Number of Inputs Input Voltage Input Delay Remarks DI450 16 24 VDC 1 ms (inputs 1 - 8) 10 ms (inputs 9 -16) Inputs 1 - 4: Counter inputs Inputs 5 - 6: Gate measurement DI475 16 24 VDC 10 ms DI476 16 24 VDC 1 ms DI477 32 24 VDC 1 ms Connection: D-type connector DI486 32 24 VDC 1 ms Connection: Terminal block DI695 16 120 / 230 VAC 50 ms
Table 47: Digital input module overview
188

8.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DI450.60-9 Short Description 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms or 10 ms, sink or sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, 4 counter inputs, 100 kHz, gate time or period measurement, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 4 Groups of Design of the Inputs Channels 1 - 4 Channels 5 -6 Channels 7 -16 Wiring Groups 1 + 2 (inputs 1 - 8) Groups 3 +4 (inputs 9 - 16) Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at 24 VDC at 30 VDC Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range B&R 2005 I/O module 16 4 8 bit counter Gate, period measurement (starting with Rev. 30.00) Digital inputs Sink Sink or source 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 8 mA Approx. 10 mA 2.8 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V Yes Yes Yes DI450
189

Product ID Switching Delay Inputs 1 -8 Typical Max. Inputs 9 -16 Typical Max. Counter Inputs Inputs Counter Size Count Frequency Gate Measurement Channels Gate Frequency Gate Pause Period Measurement Channels Input Frequency Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No DI450
1 ms 1.2 ms
10 ms 12 ms 1-4 8 bit (individual) 1) Max. 100 kHz 5 and 6 Max. 10 kHz >50 ms 5 and 6 Max. 10 kHz Max. 2 W

1) Counter inputs 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 can be linked together as a 16 bit counter.
190
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Digital Input Modules 8.6 DI475 / DI476

8.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DI475.6 3DI476.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 50: DI475 / DI476 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 4 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay Typical Max. Power Consumption 10 ms 12 ms Max. 1.5 W 16 4 Sink or source 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 5 mA 4.8 kW <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V 1 ms 1.2 ms B&R 2005 I/O module 16 4 Yes Yes Yes DI475 DI476
Table 51: DI475 / DI476 technical data
191

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No DI475 DI476
192

8.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DI477.6 Short Description 2005 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 8 electrically isolated input groups Image
8.7.2
Technical Data
DI477
Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 8 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay Typical Max. Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions
Yes Yes Yes
B&R 2005 I/O module 32 4 Sink or source 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 5 mA 4.8 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V 1 ms 1.2 ms Max. 1.5 W
Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No
B&R 2005 single width
193

8.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DI486.6 7TB718.9 7TB718.91 7TB718:90-02 7TB718:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 2 electrically isolated input groups, Order TB718 terminal blocks separately! Terminal block, 18 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 2 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay Typical Max. Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No B&R 2005 I/O module 32 16 Sink or source 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 4 mA 6 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V 0.5 ms 1 ms Max. 1.2 W in preparation Yes Yes DI486
194

8.9.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DI695.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 120/230 VAC, 50 ms, 2 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Limits 0-Signal ULow 0-Signal ILow Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Power Consumption Internal External Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Different Circuits Possible Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width 2500 VAC Yes, but not different phases B&R 2005 I/O module 16 120 / 230 VAC 50 / 60 Hz Max. 40 VAC Max. 15 mA Max. 50 ms Max. 50 ms Max. 1.5 W Max. 4 W Yes Yes Yes DI695
195

Digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs. The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are: Number of Outputs Type (relays, transistors, triacs) Switching Voltage Continuous Current
9.2 Protective Circuit

The transistor output modules DO479 and DO480 have overload protection and an internal protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching of inductive loads without external inverse diodes. Relays and triac output modules have external overload protection (fuse).
9.3 Overview
Module Number of Outputs Design Switching Voltage Min. Nom. Max. Continuous Current per Output Group Module Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A Max. 8 A Max. 2 A Max. 12 A Max. 24 A Max. 2 A Max. 8 A Max. 32 A Max. 1 A Max. 2 A Max. 4 A Max. 3 A Max. 8 A Max. 16 A Max. 32 A Max. 4 A 19.5 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC 0 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 120 VAC / 24 VDC 144 VAC / 30 VDC 30 VAC 120 VAC 144 VAC 230 VAC / 24 VDC 250 VAC / 30 VDC 30 VDC / 240 VAC 125 VDC / 264 VAC DO479 16 Transistor DO480 16 Transistor DO650 16 Relay DO690 8 Triac DO750 8 Relay DO760 8 Relay
Table 58: Digital output module overview
196
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Digital Output Modules 9.4 DO479 / DO480

9.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DO479.6 3DO480.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital output module, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 digital output module, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 2 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 59: DO479 / DO480 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Total in 2 Groups of Design Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Group Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Switching Capacity of Filament Lamps Power Consumption Internal Terminal Side at 24 V Protection Characteristics Protective Circuit Internal External Yes Only if necessary (surge) 19.5 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A Max. 8 A 0.3 mA --Max. 1 W Max. 2 W per Group B&R 2005 I/O module 16 8 Transistor 0 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 12 A1) Max. 24 A 0.1 mA 15 W / 24 V Max. 2.5 W Yes Yes Yes DO479 DO480
Table 60: DO479 / DO480 technical data
197

Product ID Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 (typ./max.) log. 1 - log. 0 (typ./max.) Switching Frequency (resistive load) Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Group - Group Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes Yes No 5 s / 110 s 60 s / 100 s Max. 500 Hz 4 s / 120 s 100 s / 120 s DO479 DO480
Table 60: DO479 / DO480 technical data (cont.)

1) Simultaneousness factor = 75 %, maximum 12 of the 16 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.
198

9.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DO650.6 3DO750.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital output module, 16 relay outputs 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A, 4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 digital output module, 8 relay outputs 230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Total in 4/2 Groups of Design Switching Voltage Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Group Module Switching Capacity Minimum Maximum Switching Frequency (nominal load) Power Consumption Protection Characteristics Short Circuit Protection (external) External Protective Circuit Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 (typ./max.) log. 1 - log. 0 (typ./max.) 5.6 ms / 10 ms 2.5 ms / 5 ms 4 ms / 6 ms 6 ms / 8 ms Fuse 8 A slow-blow per group (COM connection) Generally required Max. 4 W 120 VAC / 24 VDC 144 VAC / 30 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 8 A Max. 32 A 0.1 mA / 0.1 VDC 300 VA / 90 W Max. 10 Hz Max. 3 W 16 4 Relay / N.O. 230 VAC / 24 VDC 250 VAC / 30 VDC Max. 3 A Max. 8 A Max. 16 A 10 mA / 5 VDC 500 VA / 150 W B&R 2005 I/O module 8 4 Yes Yes Yes DO650 DO750
199

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Group - Group Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes / max. 144 VAC Yes / max. 250 VAC No Yes / max. 250 VAC Yes / max. 430 VAC No DO650 DO750
200

9.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DO690.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital output module, 8 triac outputs 120 VAC, 1 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Total in 2 Groups of Design Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Switching Voltage Frequency Continuous Current per Output Group Module Leakage Current Power Consumption Internal External Protection Characteristics Overload Protection Internal External Protective Circuit Internal External Yes By user Yes Generally required (fuse) B&R 2005 I/O module 8 4 Triac 30 VAC 120 VAC 144 VAC 45 to 63 Hz Max. 1 A Max. 2 A (simultaneousness factor = 50%) 1) Max. 4 A 4 mA (resistive load) Max. 1.5 W Max. 6 W (simultaneousness factor = 50%) 1) Yes Yes Yes DO690
201

Product ID Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay, Switching Voltage Frequency log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Switching Frequency (resistive load) Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Group - Group Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes (optotriac) Yes (optotriac) No 50 Hz 10 ms 10 ms Max. 100 Hz 60 Hz 8.5 ms 8.5 ms DO690

1) Simultaneousness factor = 50 %, maximum 4 of 8 outputs are allowed to be fully loaded at the same time.
202

9.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DO760.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 digital output module, 8 relay outputs 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A, single channel isolated outputs, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number and Type of Outputs Rated Voltage Switching Voltage Range Rated Frequency Rated Current (1-Signal) Switching Capacity Wiring Power Consumption Internal External Protection Characteristics Type of Protection Short Circuit Protection AC DC Overvoltage Protection for Contacts DC Connection B&R 2005 I/O module 4 change-over contacts / 4 normally open contacts, single channel isolation is provided 30 VDC / 240 VAC Min. 5 VDC at 1 mA DC or 45 - 63 Hz 4 A (resistive load) 2000 VA; 120 W at 30 VDC (resistive load) 4 change-over contacts / 4 normally open contacts Max. 4 W Max. 4 W Yes Yes Yes DO760
Fuse 8 A slow-blow (required externally) Fuse 4 A slow-blow (required externally) Limited to 460 V (required externally) Spark protection as required (to be connected externally)
203

Product ID Dynamic Characteristics Output Delay for Signal Changes from log 0 - log 1 log 1 - log 0 Operating Characteristics Total Output Current Following Condition must be Fulfilled Cable Cross Section Isolation Voltages under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Different Phases Possible Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Max. 32 A In 200 2.5 mm, for currents 4 A or if a recommanded value is reached 1 min 2800 VAC or 4 kV with 1.2 x 50 s pulse Yes, but only for 110 VAC Max. 13 ms (including chatter time) Max. 16 ms (including chatter time) DO760
204
10. Digital Mixed Modules

Digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules. The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs.
10.2 Overview
Module Number of Inputs Nominal Input Voltage Number of Outputs Switching Voltage Continuous Current DM476 16 24 VDC 16 24 VDC 0.4 A
Table 67: Digital mixed module overview
205

10.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 3DM476.6 Short Description 2005 digital mixed module, 16 inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, DC: sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Consumption Internal Terminal Side at 24 V Inputs Number of Inputs Total in 4 Groups of Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Wiring Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Outputs Number of Outputs Yes B&R 2005 I/O module Yes Yes Max. 2.5 W Max. 2 W 25 pin D-type socket (upper) 16 4 24 VDC / 24 VAC 30 VDC / 30 VAC Approx. 5 mA Sink or source <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V Max. 1 ms Max. 1 ms Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No 25 pin D-type plug (lower) 16 DM476
206

Product ID Design Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Protective Circuit Internal External Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Switching Frequency (resistive load) Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width DM476 Transistor 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.4 A Max. 4.8 A1) 0.3 mA Yes Only if necessary (surge) Max. 100 s Max. 100 s Max. 500 Hz Yes No
207
1) Simultaneousness factor = 75 %, maximum 12 of the 16 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.

Measured values (voltages, currents) are converted into numerical values which can be processed by the PLC using analog input modules. In the PLC, analog data is always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. Therefore, the resolution of the module used does not have to be taken into consideration when creating an application program. All analog input modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.
11.2 Overview
Module Number of Channels Input Signal Digital Converter Resolution AI350 8 10 V 12 Bit AI375 8 0 to 10 V 12 Bit AI775 8 0 to 20 mA 12 Bit
208
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Analog Input Modules 11.3 AI350 / AI375 / AI775
11.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AI350.6 3AI375.6 3AI775.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 71: AI350 / AI375 / AI775 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Data Format Delivered to the Application Program Input Impedance in Signal Range Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage between Channel and Bus under Normal Operating Conditions Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width 50 V 16 bit 2s complement $8000 - $7FF0 2 M -10 to +10 V -20 to +20 V B&R 2005 I/O module 8 0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V 12 Bit 16 bit 2s complement $0000 - $7FF8 2 M Max. 5 W 16 bit 2s complement $0000 - $7FF8 50 0 to 20 mA -50 to +50 mA Yes Yes Yes AI350 AI375 AI775
Table 72: AI350 / AI375 / AI775 technical data
209

Analog output modules convert PLC internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numbers to be converted must be in 16 bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independent of the resolution of the output module used. All analog output modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A converter is active.
12.2 Overview
Module Number of Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution AO350 8 10 V 12 Bit AO775 8 0 to 20 mA 11 Bit
Table 73: Analog Output Module Overview
210
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Analog Output Modules 12.3 AO350 / AO775

12.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AO350.6 3AO775.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 11 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 74: AO350 / AO775 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Max. Load per Output Load Impedance Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes No Max. 5 W -10 to +10 V 12 Bit 10 mA (load 1 k) Max. 600 Max. 5.5 W B&R 2005 I/O module 8 0 to 20 mA 11 Bit Yes Yes Yes AO350 AO775
Table 75: AO350 / AO775 technical data
211
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Analog Mixed Modules
13. Analog Mixed Modules

Analog mixed modules are a combination of analog input and output modules. All analog mixed modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A and A/D converters are active.
13.2 Overview
Module Number of Inputs Input Signal Number of Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution AM050 4 0 to 10 V 4 10 V 12 Bit AM051 4 0 to 20 mA 4 0 to 20 mA 12 Bit AM055 5 0 to 10 V 3 10 V 12 Bit AM374 4 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 1) 4 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 1) 12 Bit
Table 76: Analog mixed module overview

1) Can be switched in groups of 2
212
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Analog Mixed Modules 13.3 AM050

13.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AM050.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 4 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 77: AM050 order data
13.3.2 Technical Data Description refers to modules with Rev. 50.00 and higher.
Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Inputs Input Signal Outputs Output Signal Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage between Channel and Bus under Normal Operating Conditions Analog Inputs Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Analog Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance 10 V 12 Bit Min. 1 k 0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V 12 Bit 2 M 50 V B&R 2005 I/O module 4 0 - 10 V 4 10 V Max. 6.5 W Yes Yes Yes AM050
Table 78: AM050 technical data
213

Product ID Switch On/Off Behavior Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width AM050 Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: closed
214

13.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AM051.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, 4 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
13.4.2 Technical Data Description refers to modules with Rev. 50.00 and higher.
Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Inputs Input Signal Outputs Output Signal Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage between Channel and Bus under Normal Operating Conditions Analog Inputs Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Analog Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance 0 - 20 mA 12 Bit Max. 600 0 to 20 mA -50 to +50 mA 12 Bit 50 50 V B&R 2005 I/O module 4 0 - 20 mA 4 0 - 20 mA Max. 6.5 W Yes Yes Yes AM051
215

Product ID Switch On/Off Behavior Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width AM051 Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: closed
216

13.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AM055.6 Short Description 2005 analog mixed module, 5 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 3 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, 2 potentiometer voltage terminals, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Inputs Input Signal Outputs Output Signal Potentiometer Voltage Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage between Channel and Bus under Normal Operating Conditions Analog Inputs Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Analog Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance Switch On/Off Behavior 10 V 12 Bit Min. 1 k Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: closed 0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V 12 Bit 2 M 50 V B&R 2005 I/O module 5 0 -10 V 3 10 V +10 V Max. 7 W Yes Yes Yes AM055
217

Product ID Potentiometer Voltage Output Voltage Load Short Circuit Current Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width +10 V 4 x 1 kW parallel, total of max. 40 mA >100 mA AM055
Table 82: AM055 technical data (cont.)
218

13.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AM374.6 Short Description 2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0-10 V / 0-20 mA, 12 bit, 4 outputs, +/- 10 V / 0-20 mA, 12 bit, signals can be set in groups of 2, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Inputs Input Signal Group 1 Group 2 Outputs Output Signal Group 1 Group 2 Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage between Channel and Bus under Normal Operating Conditions Analog Inputs - Voltage Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Analog Inputs - Current Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution 0 to 20 mA -50 to +50 mA 12 Bit 0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V 12 Bit 2 M 50 V B&R 2005 I/O module 4 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be switched in groups of 2 Channels 1 + 2 Channels 3 + 4 4 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be switched in groups of 2 Channels 1 + 2 Channels 3 + 4 Max. 6.5 W Yes Yes Yes AM374
219

Product ID Input Impedance in Signal Range Analog Outputs - Voltage Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance Switch On/Off Behavior Analog Outputs - Current Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance Switch On/Off Behavior Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width 0 - 20 mA 12 Bit Max. 600 W Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: closed 10 V 12 Bit Min. 1 k Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: closed AM374 50
Table 84: AM374 technical data (cont.)
220

Temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed by the PLC using temperature modules. In the PLC, the number values are always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the temperature module does not have to be considered when creating the application program. For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1 steps. That means a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 C. The data format 0.1 C is supported by all temperature modules as standard. Some temperature modules can also be switched to other formats. All temperature modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.
14.2 Overview
Module Number of Channels Measurement Range Sensor Resolution AT350 4 -50 to +450 C PT100 / 3-line 13500 Steps AT450 4 -50 to +450 C PT100 / 4-line 13500 Steps AT660 8 -200 to +950 C -200 to +1,300 C
23841 Steps
Table 85: Temperature Module Overview
221
FeCuNi / Type J + L NiCrNi/Type K
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Temperature Modules 14.3 AT350 / AT450

14.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AT350.6 3AT450.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 analog input module, 4 inputs, PT100 (3-line connection), -50 to +450 degrees C, Order terminal block separately! 2005 Analog Input Module, 4 inputs, PT100 (4-line connection), -50 to +450 degrees C, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image
Table 86: AT350 / AT450 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Sensor Type Connection Standard Measurement Range Internal Resolution Measurement Current Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes No PT100 3-line connection IEC/EN 60751 -50 to +450 C 13500 Steps 2.5 mA (0.2 %) Max. 4 W B&R 2005 I/O module 4 inputs for resistance measurement PT100 4-line connection IEC/EN 60751 Yes Yes Yes AT350 AT450
Table 87: AT350 / AT450 technical data
222

14.3.3 Special Functions Scan Order The modules AT350 and AT450 offer the possibility to change the scan order. Individual channels can be scanned and converted more often in order to better register fast thermal changes (e.g. heating cartridges). Data Format In addition to the 1/10 C data format, the formats 1/10 F and 1/100 C are provided and can be selected in the application software.
223

14.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 3AT660.6 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, temperature sensor type L/J/K, -200 to +1300 degrees C, Order terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Groups Group 1 Group 2 Input Signal Nominal Allowed Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Power Consumption Sensor Setting Type Type Standard Measurement Voltage Range 2) Measurement Range Step Size Linearization FeCuNi L DIN 43710 -8.15 to 53.14 mV -200.0 to +900.0 C Individually for each group FeCuNi J DIN IEC 584 -7.89 to 54.95 mV -200.0 to +950.0 C 0.1 C Yes NiCrNi K DIN IEC 584 -5.891 to 52.398 mV -200.0 to +1,300.0 C B&R 2005 I/O module 8 differential inputs for thermocouples 2 groups Channels 1 - 4 Channels 5 - 8 -15 to +55 mV -20 to +20 V Internal >14 bit 1) >1 M Max. 6 W Yes Yes Yes AT660
224

Product ID Compensation Measurement Internal External Raw Value Measurement Standardization Measurement Voltage Range Measurement Range in Steps of 0.1 C Linearization Compensation Measurement Internal External Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width 50 V Standardized to 2 V 3) -15 to +55 mV Depends on sensor type in CPU Can be read ---AT660 -20 to +80 C -100 to +200 C adjustable

1) The internal resolution is different depending on the measurement time, but the converter value is always scaled to 20 ms. This prevents a value from being changed when the measurement time is changed! 2) Standardized to 0 C compensation temperature. 3) Voltage standardized to 2 V starting with rev. xx.01.
225

15.1 Overview
Module IF050 IF060 IF613 IF621 IF622 IF661 IF671 IF672 IF681.95 IF681.96 NW150 Description 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422, network capable, 1 RS232/TTY interface, all interfaces are electrically isolated 2005 interface module, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts 2005 interface module, 3 RS232 interfaces, CPU and IF module insert 2005 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable, CPU and IF module insert 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 RS485/RS422 interfaces: electrical isolation, network capable, CPU and IF module insert 2005 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, CPU and IF module insert 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN interfaces, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket 2005 PROFIBUS network module, electrically isolated RS485 interface used to connect to PROFIBUS networks
226

15.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF050.6 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422, network capable, 1 RS232/TTY interfaces, all interafes are electrically isolated Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Consumption Processor Section Processor Type Dual Ported RAM (DPR) Standard Communication Interfaces Electrical Isolation Interface - PLC Interface - Interface Data Formats 1) Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interface IF1 Type Design Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate 1) Handshake Lines Network Capable RS232 9 pin D-type plug Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 64 kBaud DCD, DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS, RI No Yes Yes 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1 / 1.5 / 2 RISC 576 bytes Yes B&R 2005 system module, single width Yes No Max. 7 W IF050
Table 92: IF Technical Data
227

Product ID Application Interface IF2 Type Design Input Filter / Protective Circuit Product ID Maximum Distance RS232 TTY Maximum Baudrate 1) RS232 TTY Handshake Lines RS232 TTY Network Capable Application Interface IF3 Type Design Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate 1) Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor RS485/RS422 1) 9 pin D-type socket Yes 1200 m (without repeater) 347 kBaud Yes External T-connector RS232/TTY 1) 9 pin D-type plug Yes IF050 15 m / 19200 Baud 300 m 64 kBaud 2.4 kBaud RTS, CTS ---No IF050
Table 92: IF Technical Data (cont.)

228

15.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 3IF060.6 Short Description 2005 interface module, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts Image
The following interface module inserts can be used with the IF060: Model Number 3IF613.9 3IF621.9 3IF622.9 3IF661.9 3IF671.9 3IF672.9 Description Three RS232 interfaces One RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface One RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces One RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP Slave) One RS232 interface, one RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface One RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Insert Slots Power Consumption Yes B&R 2005 system module, single width Yes No 1 (for interface module inserts) Max. 1 W IF060
15.3.3 General Information The interface module IF060 has an insert slot for interface modules. Therefore, the IF060 allows every B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPU to integrate different bus or network systems in the B&R SYSTEM 2005 via the system bus. The interface data must be prepared in the CPU. The IF060 module provides the physical connection to the insert modules. Multiple IF060 interface modules can be inserted on the main backplane as required. The maximum number of IF060 modules that can be used depends on the type of interface module inserted, the baudrate used and the performance of the CPU.
229

15.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF613.9 2005 interface module, 3 RS232 interfaces, CPU and IF module insert Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interfaces IF1, IF2 and IF3 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits RS232 UART Type ST16C654 64 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud IF1: DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS IF2 and IF3: RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060 Max. 1.2 W IF613
15.4.3 General Information The IF613 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with three RS232 interfaces and is used to connect several peripheral devices which cannot be networked (modem, printer, barcode reader, terminals, etc.).
230

15.5.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF621.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, 1 CAN interface, both are electrically isolated and network capable, CPU and IF module insert Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation IF1 - PLC Electrical Isolation IF1 - IF2 Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor Application Interface IF2 Type Controller Design Electrical Isolation IF2 - PLC Electrical Isolation IF1 - IF2 Maximum Distance CAN Controller 82527 4 pin multipoint connector Yes Yes 1,000 m RS485/RS422 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type socket Yes Yes Yes 1,200 m 115.2 kBaud Yes External T-connector Yes Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060 Max. 1.5 W IF621
231

Product ID Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor IF621 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes Optional (externally wired)
15.5.3 General Information The IF621 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS485/RS422 interface and a CAN interface. The RS485/RS422 interface is used mostly for visualization and networking based on different protocols (e.g. NET2000).
232

15.6.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF622.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 RS485/RS422 interfaces: electrically isolated, network capable, insert for CPU and IF modules Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0AC916.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, online cable Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interfaces IF2 and IF3 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit RS485/RS422 UART Type ST16C654 64 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type socket Yes Yes RS232 UART Type ST16C654 64 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 in preparation Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060 Max. 1.25 W IF622
233

Product ID Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Network Capable Connection Bus Termination Resistor IF622 1,200 m 115.2 kBaud Yes Via active RS485 bus termination (model number 0AC916.9) External, integrated in active RS485 bus termination
15.6.3 General Information The IF622 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces.
234

15.7.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF661.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, CPU and IF module insert Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller RAM Transfer Protocol Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length <100 m Bus Length <200 m Bus Length <400 m Bus Length <1,000 m Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor RS485 ASIC SPC3 1.5 KByte PROFIBUS-DP 9 pin D-type socket Yes Yes 1,000 m 12 MBit/s 1.5 MBit/s 500 kBit/s 187.5 kBit/s Yes External T-connector Yes Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060 Max. 2 W IF661
15.7.3 General Information The IF661 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an electrically isolated RS485 interface. The PROFIBUS-DP format is used as transfer protocol. Therefore, a B&R 2005 PLC can be connected as a slave in a PROFIBUS-DP network.
235

15.8.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF671.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interface IF2 Type Controller FIFO Design RS485/RS422 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type socket RS232 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060 Max. 2 W IF671
236

Product ID Electrical Isolation IF1 - PLC IF1 - IF2 Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor Application Interface IF3 Type Controller Design Electrical Isolation Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor CAN Node Number CAN Controller 82527 4 pin multipoint connector Yes 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes Optional (externally wired) IF671 Yes Yes Yes 1,200 m 115.2 kBaud Yes External T-connector
15.8.3 General Information The IF671 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface, an RS485/RS422 interface and a CAN interface.
237
Can be set using software

15.9.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF672.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN interfaces, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interfaces IF2 and IF3 Type Controller Design Electrical Isolation to PLC Between Interfaces CAN Controller 82527 2 x 4 pin multipoint connector Yes Yes RS232 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060 Max. 1.8 W IF672
238

Product ID Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor IF672 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes Optional (externally wired)
15.9.3 General Information The IF672 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces.
239
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Communication Modules 15.10 IF681.95

15.10.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface Modules 3IF681.95 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, with 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
Table 107: IF681.95 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interface IF2 Type Controller Send and receive buffer ETHERNET Controller AM79C960 128 KByte RS232 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes Insert in CP260, IF260 Max. 2.4 W IF681.95
Table 108: IF681.95 technical data
240

Product ID Design Electrical Isolation Maximum Baudrate Bus Capable IF681.95 10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket Yes 10 MBit/s Yes
Table 108: IF681.95 technical data (cont.)
15.10.3 General Information The IF681.95 interface module can be used in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and an ETHERNET interface. The ETHERNET connection is made using a 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket.
241
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Communication Modules 15.11 IF681.96

15.11.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface module 3IF681.96 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, with 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
Table 109: IF681.96 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Power Consumption Application Interface IF1 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interface IF2 Type Controller Send and receive buffer Design ETHERNET Controller AM79C960 128 KByte 10BASE-T: Twisted Pair RJ45 socket RS232 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes Insert in CP260, IF260 Max. 1.65 W IF681.96
Table 110: IF681.96 technical data
242

Product ID Electrical Isolation Maximum Baudrate Bus Capable IF681.96 Yes 10 MBit/s Yes
Table 110: IF681.96 technical data (cont.)
15.11.3 General Information The IF681.96 interface module can be used in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and an ETHERNET interface. The ETHERNET connection is made with a 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket.
243
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Communication Modules 15.12 NW150

15.12.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description PROFIBUS network module 3NW150.60-1 2005 PROFIBUS network module, electrically isolated RS485 interface used to connect to PROFIBUS networks Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
Table 111: NW150 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Power Consumption Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs Number Switch Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 9.6 kBit/s 19.2 kBit/s 93.75 kBit/s 187.5 kBit/s 500 kBit/s PROFIBUS Data Transfer Protocol Access Procedure Number of Stations Topology Coupling to Bus Transfer Media RS485 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m According to PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245 parts 1 and 2 Token passing principle with underlying master/slave principle Max. 127 (with repeater) Physical bus Direct Shielded, twisted pair Yes Two used to set the station address and one to set the baudrate Yes B&R 2005 system module, single width Yes No Max. 7 W NW150
Table 112: NW150 technical data
244

16.1 Overview
Module NC150 NC154 NC157 Description 2005 counter module, 2 inputs for incremental encoder, 32 bit, input frequency 100 kHz, encoder supply 5 to 30 VDC, 2 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 8 pin terminal block included with delivery! 2005 axis controller, 3 axes, Each of the 3 axes has the following data: input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order 12 pin terminal block separately! 2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs 24 VDC, sink, 4 pin terminal block included in the delivery!
245

16.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 3NC150.6 Short Description 2005 counter module, 2 inputs for incremental encoder, 32 bit, input frequency 100 kHz, encoder supply 5 to 30 VDC, 2 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 8 pin terminal block included with delivery! Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack Status Display Power Consumption Encoder 1 and 2 Design of the Signal Encoder Connections Encoder Inputs Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Encoder Supply Module Requirements Input Filter Input Frequency Short Filter Time Long Filter Time Counter Frequency with 4-fold Evaluation Phase Offset between Counter Channels A and B Counter Amount Counter Size Operating Modes 1) Analog Outputs Amount Output Voltage 2 -10 V to +10 V Two 9 pin D-type sockets Symmetric and asymmetric Yes No 5 to 30 V external Typ. 40 mA at 5 V / 120 mA at 30 V 2 times can be set using software Max. 100 kHz Max. 20 kHz Max. 400 kHz 90 45 2 32 Bit Incremental (4-fold, 2-fold and 1-fold evaluation) up/down counter Yes B&R 2005 I/O module Yes Yes LEDs Max. 5 W NC150
246

Product ID Digital Converter Resolution Max. Load per Output Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Counter Channels - Analog Outputs Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width NC150 12 Bit 10 mA (load 1 k ) Yes No Yes

1) Can be set using software.
16.2.3 General Information The counter module NC150 is designed for externally supplied incremental encoders. The supply voltage is connected using two terminal blocks. Internally, it is directly connected to the 9 pin D-type sockets used for both encoder connections. The encoder supply is passed on to the encoders using two pins on the D-type sockets. Two analog outputs (10 V, 12 bit resolution) are also provided to control servo drives. 16.2.4 Signal Encoder Chapter 3 B&R SYSTEM 2005 The following encoders, as well as others, can be connected to the NC 150 counter module: 5 V encoder with differential outputs (symmetrical encoder) Asymmetrical encoder with transistor outputs Symmetrical encoder with transistor outputs Encoder with open collector outputs (external pull-up resistors must be connected when using this type of encoder)
247

16.3.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Axis Controller 3NC154.60-2 2005 axis controller, 3 axes, Each of the 3 axes has the following data: input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order 12 pin terminal block separately! 2005 terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Software 1A3502.01 2005 Positioning Software, NC154.60-2 standard operating system Image
3TB162.9
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories"). Additional accessories see sections "Accessories" and "Manuals".

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack RAM System PROM NC154 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules Supported by Status Display Number of Axes Power Consumption Environmental Temperature during Operation Encoder Input - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes General Information Incremental Encoder Signal Form Evaluation Input Frequency Count Frequency Counter Size Inputs Input Level Distance between Edges Monitoring Connection using 15 pin D-type socket, incremental or SSI absolute encoder (both electrically isolated) Square wave pulse 4-fold Max. 150 kHz Max. 600 kHz 32 Bit A, A\, B, B\, R, R\ 5 V (differential input) Min. 0.8 s Broken Connection, Signal Disturbance Yes B&R 2005 system module, double width Yes No 2 MByte DRAM 2 MByte FlashPROM CP260, IF260 LEDs 3 Max. 6 W 0 to 55 C NC154
248

Product ID SSI Absolute Encoder Coding Word Size Baudrate Data Input Level Clock Output Level Monitoring Encoder Supply Ext. Input Voltage Load at Output Level 5 VDC 24 VDC Protection Servo Output - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes Output Voltage Maximum Load Resolution Output Filter Disturbance Suppression Digital Inputs - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes Amount Electrical Isolation Input Voltage Input Current Digital Output - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes 5 Yes (optocoupler) 24 VDC Approx. 10 mA 10 V, electrically isolated 5 mA 12 Bit Low pass 1st order Disturbance compensation NC154 Gray, binary Max. 31 Bit 230 kBaud 5 V (differential signal) 5 V (differential signal) Signal Disturbance, Parity, Plausibility 24 VDC Max. 400 mA per axis Max. 250 mA per axis Short Circuit and Overload Protection
16.3.3 General Information The axis controller NC154 is an active axis module, which includes all functions for operating three servo axes: Encoder input Servo output (10 V, 12 bit) Closed loop position controller (digital sampling controller) Limit and reference switch inputs Input "Controller Ready" Output "Enable Controller"
In addition, three fast trigger inputs are provided to latch the actual position for measurements. 16.3.4 Positioning Software The software for axis control is found in the axis controller FlashPROM. The software can be downloaded. Therefore, the positioning software can be updated, if necessary. 16.3.5 Closed Loop Controller The NC154 axis controller has a lag free predictable PI closed loop controller. This algorithm guarantees a high degree of dynamic rigidity and excellent path precision. 16.3.6 Positioning Types The user has a choice between several types of positioning: Online Positioning
Changing the variable values for the state of a movement (position, speed and acceleration) is possible at any sampling instant. Electronic Gears
One or more gear axes have a certain relationship to a reference axis. The gear ratio and the angles of the gear axes to each other can be changed during a movement. The gear relationship or axes coupling (turning gear axes on and off) is possible when the movement is stopped.
249
Type Switching Voltage Switching Current Short Circuit Protection
Relay 30 V Max. 1 A Soldered fuse 1.5 A

Electronic Cam Profile
Electronic cam profiles allow a non-linear connection between two drives (coupling functions) to be easily created. Several cam profiles can exist on the NC154 at the same time and they can be switched when needed. Up and down synchronization is also possible when the reference axis is not stopped. All limits are taken into consideration during this procedure (speed, acceleration). Other Applications: Flying Saw - Optimized timing for movements - Immediate return when cut is completed Cross Cutter - Optimized movement - Print mark control Interpolation - Extensive NC Interpreter - Linear, circular and helix interpolation with tangential axis - Dynamic "Look Ahead" - Gantry Axes - Real-time intervention using virtual axes Axis Synchronization - Real-time positioning - Varied synchronization conditions Virtual Axes - Virtual master - Real-time intervention in active processes (to superimpose real axes) Remote Axes - Distributed axis controller according to machine functions - Connected via field bus 16.3.7 CNC Functions Languages In addition to the standard DIN 66025 syntax, the user is also provided very useful language expansions. Therefore, statements such as IF, ELSE, WHILE, SWITCH or arithmetic and trigonometric instructions (e.g. +, *, /, sin, cos, arctan) can be used. Up to 1000 R parameters are available as variables. Interpolation Straight, circular (helix) with tangential axes, level tool radian correction. "Look Ahead" Function A "look ahead" function is implemented which is used to make sure that axes limits are not exceeded. 16.3.8 Object Oriented Axis Programming Using the new type of object oriented axis programming, tasks can be created quickly and reused. Thoroughly tested, high performance tools are used for this purpose. The success of this new principle has been indicated by solutions in the main areas of automation technology. 250 B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

16.3.9 NC154 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules When coupling axes over multiple modules (gears, cams, CNC), the set positions of the master axis are sent to the NC154 modules with the slave axes in an interrupt routine on the main CPU. The interrupt routine is not allowed to be stopped. These requirements are fulfilled by the following CPUs: CP260 IF260 when it is used as a main CPU
16.3.10 Synchronization If more than one NC154 axes controller is used in a system, the sampling instant can be synchronized by linking the "Sync" connections. This guarantees high precision even when coupling gears between different NC154 modules.
251

16.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Axis Controller 3NC157.60-1 2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs, 24 VDC, sink, 4 pin terminal block included in the delivery! Software 1A3530.01 2005 positioning software, NC157.60-1 standard operating system Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Can be Installed on Main Rack Expansion Rack RAM System PROM NC157 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules Supported by Status Display Number of Axes Power Consumption Environmental Temperature during Operation Servo Interface Type Controller Design Electrical Isolation Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Lengths up to 60 m Network Capable Bus Termination Resistor CAN Node Number CAN Controller 82527 9 pin D-type plug Yes 60 m 500 kBit/s Yes External Selection switch Yes B&R 2005 system module, double width Yes No 2 MByte DRAM 2 MByte FlashPROM CP260, IF260 LEDs 8 Max. 6 W 0 to 55 C NC157
252

16.4.3 General Information The NC157 axis controller is an active axis module that can be used to control up to eight ACOPOS axes. 16.4.4 Positioning Software The software for axis control is found in the axis controller FlashPROM. The software can be downloaded. Therefore, the positioning software can be updated, if necessary. 16.4.5 Drive Interface The NC157 axis controller has a set value generator for each axis which cyclically calculates the set positions. These set positions are transferred to the ACOPOS drives via the CAN network in each NC157 scan step. 16.4.6 Positioning Types The user has a choice between several types of positioning: Online Positioning Changing the variable values for the state of a movement (position, speed and acceleration) is possible at any sampling instant. Electronic Gears One or more gear axes have a certain relationship to a reference axis. The gear ratio and the angles of the gear axes to each other can be changed during a movement. The gear ratio or axes coupling (turning gear axes on and off) is possible when the movement is stopped. Electronic Cam Profile Electronic cam profiles allow a non-linear connection between two drives (coupling functions) to be easily created. Several cam profiles can exist on the NC157 at the same time and they can be switched when needed. Up and down synchronization is also possible when the reference axis is not stopped. All limits are taken into consideration during this procedure (speed, acceleration). Chapter 3 B&R SYSTEM 2005
Other Applications: Flying Saw - Optimized timing for movements - Immediate return when cut is completed Cross Cutter - Optimized movement - Print mark control Interpolation - Extensive NC Interpreter - Linear, circular and helix interpolation with tangential axis - Dynamic "Look Ahead" - Gantry Axes - Real-time intervention using virtual axes Axis Synchronization - Real-time positioning - Varied synchronization conditions
253

Virtual Axes - Virtual master - Real-time intervention in active processes (to superimpose real axes) Remote Axes - Distributed axis controller according to machine functions - Connected via field bus 16.4.7 CNC Functions Languages In addition to the standard DIN 66025 syntax, the user is also provided very useful language expansions. Therefore, statements such as IF, ELSE, WHILE, SWITCH or arithmetic and trigonometric instructions (e.g. +, *, /, sin, cos, arctan) can be used. Up to 1000 R parameters are available as variables. Interpolation Straight, circular (helix) with tangential axes, level tool radian correction. "Look Ahead" Function A "look ahead" function is implemented which is used to make sure that axes limits are not exceeded. 16.4.8 Object Oriented Axis Programming Using the new type of object oriented axis programming, tasks can be created quickly and reused. Thoroughly tested, high performance tools are used for this purpose. The success of this new principle has been indicated by solutions in the main areas of automation technology. 16.4.9 Synchronization If more than one NC157 axes controller is used in a system, the sampling instant can be synchronized by linking the "Sync" connections. This guarantees high precision even when coupling gears between different NC157 modules. 16.4.10 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules When coupling axes over multiple modules (gears, cams, CNC), the set positions of the master axis are sent to the NC157 modules with the slave axes in an interrupt routine on the main CPU . The interrupt routine is not allowed to be stopped. These requirements are fulfilled by the following CPUs: CP260 IF260 when it is used as a main CPU
254
17. Accessories
17.1 Overview
Model Number 0AC240.9 0G2001.00-090 3BM150.9 3TB162.9 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Description 2005 battery module Cable PC <-> NC154, RS232, NC154 operating system download 2005 dummy module 2005 terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps
Table 120: Accessory overview
255
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Accessories 17.2 AC240

17.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 0AC240.9 Short Description 2005 battery module Image
Table 121: AC240 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Slot Battery Number of Battery Compartments Connection Cable Length Connection Buffer Time with 2 Alkali-Mangan "Extra Longlife" Batteries Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2005 single width Yes On backplane included in the delivery 9 V block cell 2 40 cm 5 pin terminal block, prewired See technical data for the processor module used AC240
Table 122: AC240 technical data
17.2.3 General Information The battery module is used for central data buffering on the 2005 PLC (e.g. data and real-time clock for the XP152). It has two battery compartments for 9V block cells. Connection to the power supply module is made with a 40 cm long cable. The cable is connected to a 5 pin terminal block. A second 5 pin terminal block is included in the delivery. The two together replace the 10 pin terminal block on the power supply. A single width backplane is delivered with the battery module. The backplane is to be installed to the left of the main backplane. The battery module is inserted on this backplane and is therefore installed to the left of the power supply. If a slot is free on the main backplane next to the power supply, the AC240 module can also be inserted there.
256
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Accessories 17.3 Cable NC154 - PC

17.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 0G2001.00-090 Short Description 2005 Positioning Accessory, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC152
Table 123: Cable NC154 - PC order data
17.3.2 General Information For NC154 modules with a Rev. <54.23, the software module BOOT has to be installed in the module before the operating system update. This cable is used to connect a PC to the NC154 module. The software module BOOT (NC154.S1) can be downloaded using this connection.
257
B&R SYSTEM 2005 Accessories 17.4 BM150

17.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 3BM150.9 Short Description 2005 dummy module Image
Table 124: BM150 order data
17.4.2 General Information Dummy modules are used to fill slots which are not needed. We recommend that you fill all unused slots with dummy modules.
258

17.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 3TB162.9 Short Description 2005 terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Resistance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load Wire Cross Section Cable Type Removal Stress Relief TB162 12 Screw clamps 5.08 mm 6 m 250 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.14 mm (AWG26) - 2.5 mm (AWG12) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) Mechanical Cable tie on the module
17.5.3 General Information The NC154 module is equipped with three 12 pin pin-connectors. The TB162 terminal block is used to make connections. The terminal blocks can be removed using an ejection lever on the module.
259

17.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 3TB170.9 3TB170.91 3TB170:90-02 3TB170:91-02 Short Description 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps TB170.9 Image
TB170.91

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Resistance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Wire Cross Section Cable Type Removal Stress Relief TB170 20 Screw or cage clamps 5.08 mm 6 m 250 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.14 mm (AWG26) - 2.5 mm (AWG12) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) Mechanical Cable tie on the module

17.6.3 General Information B&R SYSTEM 2005 modules are connected using a single row terminal block. The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module.
260
18. Manuals
18.1 Overview
Model Number MASYS22005-0 MASYS22005-E Description B&R 2005 Users Manual, German B&R 2005 Users Manual, English
261
262
1. Module Overview
The "Power" column contains a power value provided by the module or required by the module. In this way, a power balance can be calculated quickly and easily for a certain hardware configuration. The power supplied by the PS modules is shown with a "+" sign. The power required by a module is shown with a "-" sign. Add the positive and negative power values to calculate the power balance. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero.

Product ID ----AI300 AI700 AI730 AO300 AO725 AO900 AT300 AT610 BM100 BP101 BP110 BP200 BP201 BP202 BP210 BP300 CP100 CP104 CP200 CP210 DI400 DI425 DI426 DI725 DI825 DO428 DO430 DO600 DO700 DO710 DS100 Description B&R 2010 Users Manual, German B&R 2010 Users Manual, English 16 voltage inputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 16 current inputs 20 mA, resolution 13 bit 8 single channel isolated current inputs 0 - 25 mA, resolution 16 bit 16 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit 8 voltage outputs 10 V, 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit 8 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) 16 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors with type K, raw value measurement Dummy module 2 slots for system bus 4 slots for system bus, incl. bus termination 1 slot for I/O bus 4 slots for I/O bus 1 slot for expansion or remote slave, I/O bus 1 slot for I/O bus, incl. bus termination 2 slots for CPU, system and I/O bus, incl. bus termination CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 2 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 6 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface, MMU, FPU 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay, 8 interrupt capable inputs 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay 32 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay 8 namur inputs, Ex(i), 12 V, 12 mA, 100 s switching delay 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A 32 relay outputs, 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A 16 relay outputs, 230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A 8 change-over contacts, 8 normally open contacts, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O -10 W -10 W -20 W -22.5 W -6 W -6 W -6 W -4 W -11 W -5 W -2.9 W -8 W -6 W -7 W -9 W 2) -k x PEncoder I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O System, I/O -9 W -9 W -6 W 1) -10 W -10 W -12 W -9 W -8 W Module Type Power Model No. MASYS22010-0 MASYS22010-E 2AI300.6 2AI700.6 2AI730.6 2AO300.6 2AO725.6 2AO900.6 2AT300.6 2AT610.6 2BM100.9 2BP101.3 2BP110.3 2BP200.4 2BP201.4 2BP202.4 2BP210.4 2BP300.4 2CP100.60-1 2CP104.60-1 2CP200.60-1 2CP210.60-1 2DI400.6 2DI425.6 2DI426.6 2DI725.6 2DI825.6 2DO428.6 2DO430.6 2DO600.6 2DO700.6 2DO710.6 2DS100.60-1 Page 342 342 320 320 321 323 323 323 325 326 340 278 278 278 278 278 278 278 291 291 291 291 306 308 308 309 310 313 313 315 315 317 294
Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2010 sorted alphabetically according to product ID
263

Product ID DS101 EX100 EX200 EX301 EX302 IF100 IF101 ME910 ME913 ME915 MP100 NC303 NW100 PS425 PS740 TB120 TB140 UM900 Description Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer with 32 transistor outputs Remote I/O Master Remote I/O Slave Expansion Slave Expansion Master Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN, 1 x ETHERNET Application memory (PLC software), 64 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM Application memory (PLC Software), 512 KByte SRAM, 1 MByte FlashPROM Application memory (PLC Software), 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM Multiprocessor, 64 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM Intelligent I/O processor, path processor for ultrasonic transducer PROFIBUS network module Power supply, 24 VDC, 100 W Power supply, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 W Terminal block, 20 pin screw clamps Terminal block, 20 pin screw clamps 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 analog inputs, 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit, 2 analog outputs, 10 V(resolution 12 bit) / 0 - 20 mA (resolution 11 bit) I/O -8 W System I/O System I/O I/O -12 W -21 W 1.5 x PEncoder -15 W +100 W +100 W Module Type I/O System I/O I/O I/O System System Power -13 W -k x PEncoder -12 W -12 W -3 W -3 W -7 W -7 W
3)
Model No. 2DS101.60-1 2EX100.50-1 2EX200.50-1 2EX301.5 2EX302.5 2IF100.60-1 2IF101.60-1 2ME910.90-1 2ME913.90-1 2ME915.90-1 2MP100.5 2NC303.60-1 2NW100.50-1 2PS425.9 2PS740.9 2TB120.9 2TB140.9 2UM900.6
Page 297 286 286 288 288 332 332 303 303 303 300 336 334 282 283 341 341 329

1) One watt is to be subtracted for each internally supplied encoder. 2) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used. 24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power 4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power 3) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used. 24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power 4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power
1.2 Sorted according to Group

Product ID Description Module Rack BP101 BP110 BP200 BP201 BP202 BP210 BP300 2 slots for system bus 4 slots for system bus, incl. bus termination 1 slot for I/O bus 4 slots for I/O bus 1 slot for expansion or remote slave, I/O bus 1 slot for I/O bus, incl. bus termination 2 slots for CPU, system and I/O bus, incl. bus termination Power Supply Modules PS425 PS740 Power supply, 24 VDC, 100 W Power supply, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 W Bus Controller Modules EX100 EX200 EX301 EX302 Remote I/O Master Remote I/O Slave Expansion Slave Expansion Master CPUs CP100 CP104 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface -10 W -10 W 2CP100.60-1 2CP104.60-1 291 291 System I/O I/O I/O -12 W -12 W -3 W -3 W 2EX100.50-1 2EX200.50-1 2EX301.5 2EX302.5 286 286 288 288 I/O I/O +100 W +100 W 2PS425.9 2PS740.9 282 283 2BP101.3 2BP110.3 2BP200.4 2BP201.4 2BP202.4 2BP210.4 2BP300.4 278 278 278 278 278 278 278 Module Type Power Model No. Page
264

Product ID CP200 CP210 Description CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 2 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 6 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface, MMU, FPU Programmable Modules DS100 DS101 MP100 Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer with 32 transistor outputs Multiprocessor, 64 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM Program Memory Modules ME910 ME913 ME915 Application memory (PLC software), 64 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM Application memory (PLC Software), 512 KByte SRAM, 1 MByte FlashPROM Application memory (PLC Software), 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM Digital Input Modules DI400 DI425 DI426 DI725 DI825 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay, 8 interrupt capable inputs 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay 32 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay 8 namur inputs, Ex(i), 12 V, 12 mA, 100 s switching delay Digital Output Modules DO428 DO430 DO600 DO700 DO710 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A 32 relay outputs, 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A 16 relay outputs, 230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A 8 change-over contacts, 8 normally open contacts, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A Analog Input Modules AI300 AI700 AI730 16 voltage inputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 16 current inputs 20 mA, resolution 13 bit 8 single channel isolated current inputs 0 - 25 mA, resolution 16 bit Analog Output Modules AO300 AO725 AO900 16 voltage outputs 10 V, resolution 12 bit 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit 8 voltage outputs 10 V, 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit Temperature Modules AT300 AT610 8 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) 16 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors with type K, raw value measurement Other Modules UM900 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 analog inputs, 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit, 2 analog outputs, 10 V(resolution 12 bit) / 0 - 20 mA (resolution 11 bit) Communication Modules IF100 IF101 NW100 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN, 1 x ETHERNET PROFIBUS network module Counter and Positioning Modules NC303 Intelligent I/O processor, path processor for ultrasonic transducer Accessories BM100 TB120 TB140 Dummy module Terminal block, 20 pin screw clamps Terminal block, 20 pin screw clamps System, I/O 2BM100.9 2TB120.9 2TB140.9 340 341 341 I/O -21 W 1.5 x PEncoder 2NC303.60-1 336 System System System -7 W -7 W -15 W 2IF100.60-1 2IF101.60-1 2NW100.50-1 332 332 334 I/O -8 W 2UM900.6 329 I/O I/O -9 W -8 W 2AT300.6 2AT610.6 325 326 I/O I/O I/O -10 W -10 W -12 W 2AO300.6 2AO725.6 2AO900.6 323 323 323 I/O I/O I/O -9 W -9 W -6 W
3)
Module Type
Power -20 W -22.5 W
Model No. 2CP200.60-1 2CP210.60-1
Page 291 291
I/O I/O System
-9 W 1) -k x PEncoder -13 W 2) -k x PEncoder -12 W
2DS100.60-1 2DS101.60-1 2MP100.5
294 297 300
2ME910.90-1 2ME913.90-1 2ME915.90-1
303 303 303
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
-6 W -6 W -6 W -4 W -11 W
2DI400.6 2DI425.6 2DI426.6 2DI725.6 2DI825.6
306 308 308 309 310
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
-5 W -2.9 W -8 W -6 W -7 W
2DO428.6 2DO430.6 2DO600.6 2DO700.6 2DO710.6
313 313 315 315 317
2AI300.6 2AI700.6 2AI730.6
320
321
265
320

Product ID Description Manuals ----B&R 2010 Users Manual, German B&R 2010 Users Manual, English MASYS22010-0 MASYS22010-E 342 342 Module Type Power Model No. Page

1) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used. 24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power 4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power 2) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used. 24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power 4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power 3) One watt is to be subtracted for each internally supplied encoder.
266
2.1 Dimensions
The B&R SYSTEM 2010 consists of both single and double width modules. The width corresponds to the number of slots required:
Width Single width Double width Slots 1 2
Table 3: General Dimensions
The measurements given are installation measurements. The depth of the backplane must be taken into consideration to find the total depth of the PLC.
2.2 Basic Module Construction

Each module front is divided into two areas: Status display Connection area
The status display is found behind a transparent plastic door which can be opened by swinging it upwards. Display and/or operational elements such as a seven segment display, status LEDs, a number switch, a reset key, etc. are found here depending on the module. The plastic door is to be closed when operating the PLC. The connection area is situated behind the module door. D-type connectors and pin-connectors for terminal blocks can be found here. The slot for the application memory is found behind module door on processor modules (double width).
267
Diagram 1: 2010 module dimensions

A legend strip can be inserted on the inner side of the module doors of I/O modules and the CPU. This legend strip can be used to label the terminal block connections and the interface assignments.
Diagram 2: B&R SYSTEM 2010 module construction
2.3 Differences between System and I/O Modules

System and I/O modules belonging to the 2010 system can be differentiated between optically. The bottom edge of the module door is angled on I/O modules and straight on system modules. This allows a visual check of your systems integrity. Only I/O modules (slanted door) are allowed to the right of the CPU and only system modules (straight door) are allowed to the left of the CPU.
Diagram 3: B&R SYSTEM 2010 system and I/O modules
268
B&R SYSTEM 2010 General Information 2.4 Module Rack

The backplane where the system or I/O bus is located is modular. Backplanes are available in different widths and are divided into three different groups:
Diagram 4: Different types of B&R SYSTEM 2010 module racks
Backplane dimensions: Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Diagram 5: Backplane dimensions
269
B&R SYSTEM 2010 General Information 2.5 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail which conforms to the standard DIN EN 50022 is required to install the PLC. The mounting rail must be grounded and must make electrical contact with the switching cabinets back wall. Follow the manufacturers installation instructions!
Diagram 6: Mounting rail
2.6 Installation
The installation is only allowed to be carried out by a qualified personnel! The installation of the PLC takes place in the following order: 1) Installing the mounting rail 2) Installing the backplane 3) Installing the PLC modules 2.6.1 Installing the Module Rack The following steps are to be taken to connect the individual backplane modules together on the mounting rail: a) Set all fastening levers to the "OPEN" position b) Hang the left-most backplane module in the desired position on the mounting rail c) Hang all other backplane modules on the mounting rail individually and push them to the left up against the neighboring backplane module until the connecting clip locks into place. The guide pegs must align with the respective holes in the module to the left. d) After all backplane modules have been installed and connected together, all fastening levers should be set to the "CLOSE" position. Both system and I/O buses must be terminated using a backplane module with a bus terminator (Exception: System bus with 2 slots). The backplane modules should be arranged so that the single width modules are situated at the end of the bus and the quadruple width modules are connected directly to the backplane module for the CPU. This makes it easier to integrate future backplane expansions.
270

Removing backplane modules is done in the reverse order.
Diagram 8: Installing the backplane module on the mounting rail
Diagram 9: Push the module rack to the left
271

2.6.2 Install the PLC modules After all of the backplane modules are fastened securely to the mounting rail in their proper positions, the PLC modules can be installed in their respective slots on the backplanes. A module is to be installed in the following order: (1) Hang the module in the corresponding module slot using the module support hook.
Diagram 10: Install module
(2) Tip the module back until the upper fastening clip clicks onto the PLC module.
Diagram 11: Tip the module back
272

The PLC modules are removed in the opposite order. Pressing the module fastening lever (1) will unclip the locking mechanism. The module can then be tilted forward (2) and removed from the backplane (3).
Diagram 12: Removing a module
2.7 Terminal Block TB120 / TB140

Wiring the module is done with a double row terminal block that can be easily be inserted or removed. Using the special coding pins on the terminal block and on the socket in the module, a clear relationship (terminal block ! module or slot) can be established. The connection of the double row terminal block is monitored and indicated by a status LED.
Diagram 13: Terminal block TB120
Diagram 14: Terminal block TB140
273

A lever has been integrated which allows the terminal block to be locked into place and removed. This eases use, even for 40 pin terminal blocks.
Diagram 15: Integrated terminal block lever
2.7.1 Cabling Terminal Blocks All cables (cable bundles) are to be run down from the terminal blocks. A cable tie is used to relieve stress on the terminal block and is attached to the slots provided.
2.7.2 Coding the Terminal Block Coding makes it possible to ensure that a terminal block cannot be connected to the wrong module. For example, coding the terminal block can prevent a terminal block which is meant for a digital output module from being connected to an input module. Coding is done using 6 coding pins on the terminal block and the socket in the module. This makes it almost impossible to accidentally switch neighboring terminal blocks.
2.8 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity

The following values are valid for all B&R SYSTEM 2010 modules if no other values are listed in the "Technical Data" section.
Environmental Temperature during Operation Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 5 to 95 %, non-condensing
Table 4: Environmental temperature and relative humidity
274
3. Module Rack
The B&R 2010 system backplane has a modular construction. The individual backplane modules are installed on the mounting rail. The respective bus system (either I/O bus or system bus) and the supply lines are on these backplane modules. The modular construction allows you to create a backplane to suit the job and the environment. We recommend that you construct your backplane with as few empty slots as possible. Dummy modules must be installed in all free slots. Both system and I/O buses must be terminated using a backplane module with a bus terminator (exception: system bus with 2 slots). The module addresses of I/O modules are determined by the slots that they are in (slot coding). Addressing begins with slot 1 on the I/O bus, which has address 1. Modules addresses can be read directly from a two digit seven segment status display which is located on the front of the I/O modules. The module addresses of system modules are not slot dependant. System module addresses are set using a number switch on the module.
Diagram 17: Module addresses of system modules and I/O modules
275
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Module Rack 3.2 Configuration of the Various Module Racks
The following backplane configurations are available: Main backplane with system bus: BP110, BP300, BP210 Main backplane without system bus: BP101, BP200, BP201 Expansion backplane (remote I/O or I/O bus expansion): BP202
Different backplane modules are to be used, depending on the backplane configuration. The following backplane modules are available (see diagram):
Diagram 18: Different types of B&R SYSTEM 2010 module racks
276

The following modules are to be used for the different backplane configurations:
Diagram 19: Backplane configuration
All modules shown in gray must be used with the respective configuration. One or more of the backplane modules shown as dotted lines can be used to expand the backplane. Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 The backplane modules for the I/O bus should be arranged so that the single width modules are situated at the end of the bus and the quadruple width modules are connected directly to the backplane module for the CPU. This makes it easier to integrate future backplane expansions. When configuring the backplanes, remember that the number of slots is limited and these limits are not allowed to be exceeded:
Bus System Bus I/O Bus Number of Slots 8 20
Table 5: Maximum number of slots
277
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Module Rack 3.3 BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300
3.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2BP101.3 2BP110.3 2BP200.4 2BP201.4 2BP202.4 2BP210.4 2BP300.4 Short Description 2010 backplane module, 2 slots for system modules 2010 backplane module, 4 slots for system modules with bus termination for the system bus 2010 backplane module, 1 slot for an I/O module 2010 backplane module, 4 slots for I/O modules 2010 backplane module, 1 slot for expansions/remote slave 2010 backplane module, 1 slot for an I/O module with bus termination for the I/O bus 2010 backplane module, 2 slots for a CPU with bus termination for the system bus Image
Table 6: BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300 order data

Backplane Modules for the System Bus Product ID C-UL-US Listed Number of Slots for System Modules Bus Termination Dimensions Height Width Depth Backplane Modules for the I/O Bus Product ID C-UL-US Listed Number of Slots for I/O Module Expansion or Remote Slave Bus Termination Dimensions Height Width Depth Backplane Module for the CPU Product ID C-UL-US Listed Number of Slots Bus Termination Dimensions Height Width Depth BP300 Yes 2 (for 1 CPU) Yes (system bus) 285 80 20 1 ---No 285 40 20 4 ---No 285 160 20 BP200 BP201 Yes ---1 No 285 40 20 1 ---Yes (I/O bus) 285 40 20 BP202 BP210 2 No 285 80 20 BP101 Yes 4 Yes (system bus) 285 160 20 BP110
Table 7: BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300 technical data
278
4. Power Supply Modules

Power supply modules create the voltage required internally by the PLC from the input voltage (24 VDC, 120 VAC or 230 VAC). Every main and expansion unit requires at least one power supply module. Power supply modules can only be installed on the I/O bus (never on the system bus). The distinguishing feature relevant to power supply modules is the input voltage range. When configuring a system, make sure that the power consumption of all modules to be used is not greater than the output power of the power supply modules. Power can be supplied to the B&R SYSTEM 2010 using any number of power supply modules (including possible redundant modules) which can be placed in almost any slot in the entire system. The supply modules can be inserted or removed while under power.
4.2 Safety Features

Power supply modules have internal current limitation (short circuit protection) and thermal overload protection. A fuse protects the module against overloads and reverse polarity. The fuse is behind the module door. The functions of the power supply module can be monitored with a READY relay. The READY relay is closed when the power supply module is functioning properly. If an error occurs (e.g. overload), the relay opens. The READY relay can be used to externally monitor the supply.
4.3 Overview
Power Supply Module Input Voltage Output Power Fuse (slow-blow) PS425 24 VDC 100 W 10 A / 250 V PS740 90 ... 270 VAC 100 W 1.6 A / 250 V
Table 8: Power supply module overview
4.4 Power Supply Module Location

(1) B&R recommends operating a power supply module in the far right slot of the I/O bus. (2) The slots for the other power supplies can be determined using a simple rule: Add the power consumption of the modules and the power provided by power supplies which are already installed (including the sign) from right to left. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero, otherwise another power supply module must be installed (see the following example). The first slot is an exception because a power supply cannot be inserted on the system bus. (3) Due to power dissipation of the power supply, which in turn causes heat, power supplies should not be situated directly next to modules with high power consumption.
279

Example to clarify any problems concerning the location of the power supply modules: The following modules are required in a system:
Amount Module Description Bus Power Consumption [W] Per module 1 1 1 4 3 2 2 NW100 CP100 AI300 AT610 AO300 DI426 DO700 Network module CPU Analog input module Thermocouple module Analog output module Digital input module Digital output module System bus System or I/O bus I/O bus I/O bus I/O bus I/O bus I/O bus 15 10 9 8 10 6 6 ! = ! 15 10 9 32 30 12 12 120
Table 9: Power Supply Module Location
The sum of this calculation determines that at least two power supply modules are needed. Take note that the output power of the power supply modules depends on the environmental temperature and the input voltage (see "Technical Data"). The following table can be used to determine the slots for the power supply modules:
Module PS DO700 DO700 DI426 DI426 AO300 AO300 AO300 AT610 AT610 AT610 AT610 AI300 PS CP100 NW100 Power [W] 1) +100 -6 -6 -6 -6 -10 -10 -10 -8 -8 -8 -8 -9 +100 -10 -15 [W] +100 +94 +88 +82 +76 +66 +56 +46 +38 +30 +22 +14 +5 +105 +95 +80 80 W is available in addition to the power required by the modules being used (reserve). A second power supply module must be installed here because there is not enough power for another module (5 W). Remarks B&R recommendation: Install a power supply module in the far right slot of the I/O bus.
Table 10: Power supply module slots

1) The power consumption of a module is indicated with "-" and the power supplied by a power supply module is indicated with "+".
280

According to the calculation, the system would look like this (see diagram). If the modules are set up differently, the calculation must be made again. After the number of power supply modules required for the system has been determined, the required backplane modules can be selected (see "Backplane Modules"). All empty slots must be filled with dummy modules.
Diagram 20: System arrangement
281
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Power Supply Modules 4.5 PS425

4.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 2PS425.9 Short Description 2010 power supply module, 24 VDC, 100 W Image
Table 11: PS425 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum External Backup Capacitor for Single Phase Bridge for Three Phase Bridge Output Power Current Requirements Protection Fuse Thermal overload protection Current limitation Peripherals Status Display READY Relay Design Nominal Switching Voltage Max. Load on Contacts Transient Voltage Protection LEDs Normally open 24 VDC / 230 VAC 2A 2.5 kV External 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC 20000 F 12000 F 100 W Max. 6.5 A 10 A (slow-blow) / 250 V Monitoring the housing temperature Monitoring the power supplied Yes B&R 2010 power supply module, single width BP200, BP201, BP210 PS425
Table 12: PS425 technical data
282
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Power Supply Modules 4.6 PS740

4.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 2PS740.9 Short Description 2010 power supply module, 100-240 VAC, 100 W Image
Table 13: PS740 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Supply Input Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Overvoltage Peak Value Half-peak Duration Output Power Current Requirements Protection Fuse Thermal overload protection Current limitation Peripherals Status Display READY Relay Design Nominal Switching Voltage Max. Load on Contacts Transient Voltage Protection LEDs Normally open 24 VDC / 230 VAC 2A 2.5 kV External 90 VAC 100 to 240 VAC 270 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 750 V 1.3 ms non-periodic see Diagram "Output Power" Max. 1.1 A 1.6 A (slow-blow) / 250 V Monitoring the housing temperature Monitoring the power supplied Yes B&R 2010 power supply module, single width BP200, BP201, BP210 PS740
Table 14: PS740 technical data
283

4.6.3 Output Power The output power of the PS740 power supply module sinks if the input voltage decreases or the operating temperature increases (because of internal temperature monitoring). This must be taken into consideration when planning your power requirements.
Diagram 21: Output power in relationship to temperature
4.6.4 Supplying External Components The secondary voltage (28 V) produced can be switched to the I/O bus (PLC system) or to a terminal block on a module using a toggle switch. This makes it possible to use this power supply to provide power for external I/O components.
284

5.1 Overview
Module EX100 EX200 EX301 EX302 Description 2010 remote I/O master, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus 2010 remote I/O slave, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus 2010 expansion slave, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately! 2010 expansion master, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately!
Table 15: Bus Controller module overview
285

5.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Remote I/O Bus Controller 2EX100.50-1 2EX200.50-1 2010 remote I/O master, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus 2010 remote I/O slave, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Short Description Image
Table 16: EX100 / EX200 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs Number Switch NODE# Standard Communication Interfaces Interface Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 100 kBit/s 181 kBit/s 500 kBit/s 1000 kBit/s 2000 kBit/s Remote I/O Bus Access Procedure Number of Remote I/O Masters on the System Bus Number of Slaves Topology Connection to the Bus Transfer Media Max. 8 Max. 31 (without repeater) Physical bus Direct Shielded, twisted pair Master-slave principle ----2 x RS485 2 x 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m Max. 200 m Max. 100 m Used to set the module address Used to set the slave address Yes ---B&R 2010 system module BP101, BP110 Max. 12 W Yes B&R 2010 I/O module BP202 EX100 - Remote Master EX200 - Remote Slave
Table 17: EX100 / EX200 technical data
286

Product ID Termination Resistance Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width EX100 - Remote Master External EX200 - Remote Slave
Table 17: EX100 / EX200 technical data (cont.)
287

5.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2EX301.5 2EX302.5 0G0010.00-090 B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 0G0012.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Short Description 2010 Expansion Slave, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately! 2010 Expansion Master, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately! Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for Image
Table 18: EX301 / EX302 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption Peripherals Interfaces Transfer Media Length Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width 1 for connection to an expansion master Expansion Cable 1 m or 2 m 2 for connection of two expansion slaves BP202 Max. 3 W Yes B&R 2010 I/O module BP200, BP201, BP210 EX301 Expansion Slave EX302 Expansion Master
Table 19: EX301 / EX302 technical data
288
6. CPUs
The CPU is operated on the BP300 backplane module. It requires two slots. A CPU cannot be operated in an expansion unit.
6.2 Status Area

The status area contains status LEDs, a two digit status display, various keys and the lithium battery compartment.
Diagram 22: B&R SYSTEM 2010 CPU status area
6.3 Connection area

Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 The serial interfaces (online interface), a terminal block for FORCE and READY contacts, a key switch and the slot for the application memory are all found behind the module doors. Behind the left module door Behind the right module door
Diagram 23: B&R SYSTEM 2010 CPU connection area
289
B&R SYSTEM 2010 CPUs 6.4 Safety Features

A Ready Relay can be used to monitor the functionality of the PLC. The ready relay is closed during normal operation and opens if an error which causes the PLC to fail occurs. The ready relay is normally connected to the E-STOP circuit. The FORCE contact is coupled with the "FORCED" LED on the display and is closed if at least one process variable is "forced" to a certain value.
6.5 Programming
Automation Studio Automation Basic (previously PL2000) ANSI C IEC 1131 Ladder Diagram (LAD) IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) IEC 1131 Structured Text (ST) IEC 1131 Instruction List (IL) PG2000 Instruction List (IL) Ladder Diagram (LAD) PL2000 High Level Language (structured text)
Table 20: CPU programming
6.6 Overview
Module CP100 CP104 CP200 CP210 Description 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated RS485/422, RS 485/422: network capable, Order application memory separately! 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately! 2010 CPU, 128 KB + 2 MB SRAM, 2x4 KB Cache, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS 485/422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately! 2010 CPU, 128 KB + 6 MB SRAM, 2x4 KB Cache, MMU + FPU, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS 485/422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!
290
B&R SYSTEM 2010 CPUs 6.7 CP100 / CP104 / CP200 / CP210

6.7.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU 2CP100.60-1 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, RS485/RS422: network capable, Order application memory separately! 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately! 2010 CPU, 128 KB + 2 MB SRAM, 2 x 4 KB Cache, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS485/RS422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately! 2010 CPU, 128 KB+6 MB SRAM, 2x4 KB Cache, MMU+FPU, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS485/RS422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately! Image
2CP104.60-1
2CP200.60-1
2CP210.60-1
Table 22: CP100 / CP104 / CP200 / CP210 order data

Model Number Short Description Application Memory
2ME913.90-1 2ME915.90-1
2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system Accessories
0G0001.00-090 0AC201.9 7AC911.9 0AC912.9 0AC913.92 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9
Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell Bus connector, CAN Bus adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC
Table 23: Application memory and accessories

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption (incl. APM) Max. 10 W Yes B&R 2010 CPU, double width BP300 Max. 20 W Max. 22.5 W CP100 CP104 CP200 CP210
Table 24: CP100 / CP104 / CO200 / CP210 technical data
291
2ME910.90-1
2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

Product ID Processor Section Communication MMU and FPU Instruction Cycle Time Cache Dual Ported RAM (DPR) System RAM Application Memory (not incl.) Data Buffering Lithium Battery in CPU Gold Foil Capacitor in CPU Battery Monitoring Peripherals System bus Real-time Clock Resolution Key Switch Reset Button Three user keys Status Display READY Relay Design Switching Voltage Nominal Maximum Max. Load on the Contacts Transient Voltage Protection FORCE Relay Design Switching Voltage Nominal Maximum Max. Load on the Contacts Transient Voltage Protection Standard Communication Interfaces Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate Application Interface IF2 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate Application Interface IF3 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate Bus Length 10 -60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m Application Interface IF4 Electrical Isolation Design Distance Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud Max. 64 kBaud RS232/TTY 2) Yes 9 pin D-type plug RS232: Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud, TTY: Max. 300 m Max. 64 kBaud RS485/RS422 2) Yes 9 pin D-type socket Max. 1,200 m Max. 347 kBaud CAN Yes 9 pin D-type plug Max. 1,000 m 500 kBits/s 250 kBits/s 50 kBits/s CAN Yes 9 pin D-type plug Max. 1,000 m 500 kBits/s 250 kBits/s 50 kBits/s RS232 Yes 9 pin D-type plug Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud Max. 64 kBaud RS485/RS422 2) Yes 9 pin D-type socket Max. 1,200 m Max. 347 kBaud Yes Nonvolatile, battery buffered 10 ms Yes Yes UP, DOWN, ENTER can be programmed by user Alphanumeric LCD display (2 lines with 8 characters each), 6 status LEDs Normally open 24 VDC / 230 VAC 30 VDC / 270 VAC 3A 2 kV Required externally Normally open 24 VDC / 230 VAC 30 VDC / 270 VAC 3A 2 kV Required externally 256 KB SRAM No 0.8 s No 128 KByte SRAM 2 MB SRAM ME910, ME913, ME915 Min. 2 years 1) Min. 10 min Yes 6 MB SRAM RISC No 0.125 s 2 * 4 KByte Yes CP100 CP104 CP200 CP210
Table 24: CP100 / CP104 / CO200 / CP210 technical data (cont.)

1) A full battery also has to be in the APM. Otherwise, the buffer time is reduced to 1 year because the RAM in the APM is also being buffered! 2) The interface can be set using software.
292
7. Programmable Modules
7.1 Overview
Module DS100 DS101 MP100 Description 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 s, sink, Order terminal blocks separately! 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 s, sink, 32 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately! 2010 multiprocessor, 64 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, RS485/RS422: network capable, Order application memory separately!
Table 25: Programmable module overview
293
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Programmable Modules 7.2 DS100

7.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DS100.60-1 Short Description 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 s, sink, Order terminal blocks separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
2TB140.9
Table 26: DS100 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption 24 V encoder supply 4.6 V encoder supply Processor Section Communication Instruction Cycle Time Dual Ported RAM (DPR) System RAM Encoder Supply (internal) SSI Absolute Encoder Voltage Load Absolute Encoder with Parallel IF Voltage Load Protection Electrical Isolation Encoder to be Used Type Synchronous Serial Interface Coding Resolution Operating Range Parallel Interface Coding Resolution Absolute encoder (single turn) Gray or dual Max. 16 Bit 4096 steps Gray or dual Max. 12 bit 24 V 10% Max. 120 mA 4.6 V 10% Max. 120 mA Short circuit protection and current limitation Yes RISC 0.8 s 384 Byte SRAM (not buffered) 256 KByte SRAM (not buffered) Yes B&R 2010 I/O module BP200, BP201, BP210 9 W + 1.5 x encoder power 9 W + 2.5 x encoder power DS100
Table 27: DS100 technical data
294

Product ID Differential Outputs Number of Differential Outputs Output Level Output Frequency Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Differential Inputs Number of Differential Inputs Input Level Input Frequency Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Digital Inputs Number of Inputs Total in 4 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Count Frequency Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width 16 4 Sink 24 VDC 30 VDC 4.4 kW <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V (max. and typ.) 5 s (pulse width 20 s) 5 s (pulse width 20 s) Max. 25 kHz (1:1 ratio) Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No 3 RS422 standard Max. 100 kHz Yes (optocoupler) No 3 RS422 standard Max. 100 kHz Yes (optocoupler) No DS100
Table 27: DS100 technical data (cont.)
7.2.3 General Information The DS100 module is a programmable I/O module with 3 differential outputs, 3 differential inputs and 16 digital inputs. The main application area for this module is electronic drum sequencers. The drum sequencer has its name from its mechanical predecessor, which functioned using a series of cams situated on a rotating drum. Each cam corresponds to a certain output, which is activated at certain positions as the drum rotates. An electronic version of the drum sequencer has the following advantages over the mechanical drum sequencer: Better switching precision over the entire speed range (machine acceleration and deceleration, production speed changes) No mechanical wear caused by switching cycles Easier cam modification (changing products) Definition of compensation times (dead time compensation)
When used as a drum sequencer, the DS100 intelligent I/O processor can calculate the output states of up to 128 outputs according to the current angular position. In addition, a compensation time can be used for the calculation to offset the mechanical commutation times. The output states are stored in the DPR (Dual Port RAM) and can be read cyclically by the PLC CPU and then copied to any digital output modules. To read the current angular position, the following encoders can be connected to the differential inputs and outputs or the digital inputs on the DS100 module: Incremental encoder Absolute encoder with synchronous serial interface (SSI) Absolute encoder with parallel interface
295

The coding method (gray or dual) and the encoder resolution can be defined by the user with software (function blocks). The encoder supply is provided by the module. It is electrically isolated from the PLC, short circuit protected and current limited and is output on the terminal block. The electronic drum sequencer can be configured by the user using function blocks. The respective software (including software documentation) can be obtained from B&R.
296
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Programmable Modules 7.3 DS101

7.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DS101.60-1 Short Description 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 s, sink, 32 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
2TB140.9
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").
Table 28: DS101 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption 24 V encoder supply 4.6 V encoder supply Processor Section Communication Instruction Cycle Time Dual Ported RAM (DPR) System RAM Encoder Supply (internal) SSI Absolute Encoder Voltage Load Absolute Encoder with Parallel IF Voltage Load Protection Electrical Isolation Encoder to be Used Type Synchronous Serial Interface Coding Resolution Operating Range Parallel Interface Coding Resolution Absolute encoder (single turn) Gray or dual Max. 16 bit 4096 steps Gray or dual Max. 12 bit 24 V 10% Max. 120 mA 4.6 V 10% Max. 120 mA Short circuit protection and current limitation Yes RISC 0.8 s 384 Byte SRAM (not buffered) 256 KByte SRAM (not buffered) in preparation B&R 2010 I/O module BP200, BP201, BP210 13 W +1.5 x encoder power 13 W + 2.5 x encoder power DS101
Table 29: DS101 technical data
297

Product ID Differential Outputs Number of Differential Outputs Output Level Output Frequency Product ID Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Differential Inputs Number of Differential Inputs Input Level Input Frequency Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Digital Inputs Number of Inputs Total in 4 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Count Frequency Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Digital Outputs Number of Digital Outputs Total in 4 Groups of Design Wiring Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output per Group Module Protective Circuit Internal External Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Switching Frequency (resistive load) Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Group - Group Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 double width 32 8 Transistor Source 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A Max. 16 A Yes Only if necessary (surge) Typ. 5 s / max. 110 s Typ. 60 s / max. 100 s Max. 500 Hz Yes Yes No 16 4 Sink 24 VDC 30 VDC 4.4 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V (max. and typ.) 5 s (pulse width 20 s) 5 s (pulse width 20 s) Max. 25 kHz (1:1 ratio) Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No 3 RS422 standard Max. 100 kHz Yes (optocoupler) No 3 RS422 standard Max. 100 kHz DS101 Yes (optocoupler) No DS101
Table 29: DS101 technical data (cont.)
298

General Information The DS101 module is a programmable I/O module with 3 differential outputs, 3 differential inputs, 3 digital inputs and 32 digital outputs. Electronic drum sequencers are the main area of application for this module. The DS101 is basically the same as the DS100, but has 32 transistor outputs which the intelligent I/O processor handles without the support of the PLC CPU.
299
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Programmable Modules 7.4 MP100

7.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Multiprocessor 2MP100.5 2010 multiprocessor, 64 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, RS485/RS422: network capable, Order application memory separately! Application Memory 2ME910.90-1 2ME913.90-1 2ME915.90-1 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
Table 30: MP100 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption (incl. APM) Processor Section Communication Instruction Cycle Time Dual Ported RAM (DPR) System RAM Application Memory (not incl.) Data Buffering Lithium Battery (APM) Gold Foil Capacitor (APM) Battery Monitoring Peripherals System Bus Reset Button Status Display Standard Communication Interfaces Application Interface IF1 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate RS232 No 9 pin D-type plug 15 m / 19200 Baud 64 kBaud Yes Yes 8 Status LEDs RISC 0.8 s 64 KByte SRAM 256 KByte SRAM ME910, ME913, ME915 Min. 1 year 1) Min. 5 min Yes Yes B&R 2010 system module, single width BP101, BP110 Max. 12 W MP100
Table 31: MP100 technical data
300

Product ID Application Interface IF3 Electrical Isolation Design Max. Distance Max. Baudrate MP100 RS485/RS422 2) Yes 9 pin D-type socket 1,200 m 347 kBaud
Table 31: MP100 technical data (cont.)

1) Buffering taken over by lithium battery in APM. RAM is buffered in the APM and MP, therefore the buffer duration is reduced to 1 year. 2) The interface can be set using software.
7.4.3 General Information Multiprocessors are used to reduce the load on the CPU, and to increase the performance of the PLC system. The following list contains some of the tasks that can be carried out by multiprocessors: Preprocessing data Preparing data Monitoring functions during commissioning and service Communication via serial interfaces
The multiprocessor communicates with the CPU using a common memory area (Dual Ported RAM). Additionally, the multiprocessor has a system bus interface which can be used to actively access the system bus. Using this system interface, the multiprocessor can exchange data with the CPU and other system modules. The CPU and the multiprocessor are software compatible. This means that all programs in the CPU (e.g. application tasks) can also run on the multiprocessor. The multiprocessor can be connected to the programming device via the RS232 interface.
301
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Program Memory Modules

The application memory module is inserted into the front of the CPU. User RAM, User PROM and Operating System ROM are found in the application memory module.
8.2 Buffering the RAM

The User RAM is buffered by a lithium battery. The memory contents remain for at least 2 years without power. The buffer time is shorter if the application memory module is in a CPU because the System RAM in the CPU is also buffered by this battery when power is not applied if the lithium battery in the CPU is not available.
8.3 Overview
Module ME910 ME913 ME915 Description 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system
Table 32: Application memory module overview
302
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Program Memory Modules 8.4 ME910 / ME913 / ME915
8.4.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Application Memory 2ME910.90-1 2ME913.90-1 2ME915.90-1 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system Accessories 0AC200.9 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, cylindrical battery Image
Table 33: ME910 / ME913 / ME915 order data
8.4.2 Technical Data Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 303

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Operating System Memory User SRAM User FlashPROM Deleting/Programming FlashPROM FlashPROM Write Protection Buffering the RAM Lithium Battery (APM) Gold Foil Capacitor (APM) Storage Storage Temperature APM without Lithium Battery APM with Lithium Battery Lithium Battery (not installed) Storage Time Lithium Battery (not installed) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions Height Width Depth 103 mm 32 mm 122 mm -20 to +70 C -20 to +60 C -20 to +60 C Max. 3 years at 30 C 64 KByte 256 KByte 512 KByte 1024 KByte Programming logic in the module, LED display Switch on the module Min. 2 years 1) Min. 10 min. 2 MByte 2 MByte Yes PLC Software ME910 ME913 ME915
Table 34: ME910 / ME913 / ME915 technical data

1) The buffer time given refers to application memory that is not installed in a processor module. Otherwise, the buffer time is reduced to 1 year because the RAM in the processor module is also being buffered.

9.2 Input Filter

Diagram 24: Input filter
9.3 Overview
Module Number of Inputs Input Voltage Input Circuit Switching Range Hysteresis Input Delay Remarks 10 ms 8 CSI inputs 4 counter inputs 10 ms 1 ms 50 ms DI400 32 24 VDC DI425 32 24 VDC DI426 32 24 VDC DI725 32 120 / 230 VAC 1.2 to 2.1 mA Typ. 0.5 mA 100 s Ignition protection [EEx ia] IIC DI825 8
Table 35: Digital input module overview
304
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Digital Input Modules 9.4 Sink/Source Connections

All 24 VDC input modules from the B&R SYSTEM 2010 (except DI825) can be wired as sink or source circuits. The inputs on a module are normally separated in electrically isolated groups of four inputs, therefore individual group can also be wired differently. In a sink circuit (current consumer for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group is connected to signal ground and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to 24 V.
Diagram 25: Sink Connection
For source wiring (current supplier from the sensor's point of view), the COM connection of an input group is connected to +24 VDC, and the inputs are connected to GND switching sensors.
Diagram 26: Source Connection
305

9.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DI400.6 Short Description 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink/source, 8 electrically isolated input groups, 8 change-of-state inputs, 4 counter inputs, 100 kHz, gate or period measurement, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
2TB140.9

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Modules per System Number of Inputs Total in 8 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay Typical Max. CSI Inputs Amount Delay Interrupt Triggered Counter Inputs Amount Input Frequency Resolution Used for Power Consumption B&R 2010 I/O module 1 32 4 Sink or source 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 6 mA Approx. 4 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V 10 ms 12 ms 8 5 s When state changes 4 Max. 100 kHz 16 Bit Event counting, gate / period measurement Max. 6 W Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 DI400
306

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No DI400
9.5.3 Special Functions Inputs 1 to 16 have special functions:

Inputs Input 1 - 8 Input 9 / 10 Input 11 / 12 Input 13 / 14 Input 15 / 16 Special Functions 8 change-of-state inputs (CSI 1 ... CSI 8) Counter 1 / Gate 1 Counter 2 / Gate 2 Counter 3 / Gate 3 Counter 4 / Gate 4
Table 38: Digital input module special functions
9.5.4 Change-of-State Inputs Inputs 1 to 8 can be selectively enabled for interrupt generation. If the state of an enabled input changes, an interrupt (IRQ) is created in the CPU and the appropriate IRQ task is started. With active CSI inputs, the normal input function is not affected. Each input can still be read normally regardless of if an input is enabled as a CSI input. 9.5.5 Counter (16 bit) Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 Four independent 16 bit counters are available to the user using the input pairs 9/10, 11/12, 13/14 and 15/16. The counters can be reset by the application program at any time (using software) to provide a defined starting point (reference value). An overflow message is not registered. Each counter can be configured individually for: Event counting Gate measurement Period measurement
For gate and period measurement, an input signal (gate input) is measured either with an external or an internal frequency. The external frequency is connected to the counter input (max. 100 kHz). When using an internal frequency, either 1 MHz or 4 MHz can be selected. Each input can still continue to be read as a normal digital input (10 ms input delay), regardless of if it is used as counter input or a gate input.
307
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Digital Input Modules 9.6 DI425 / DI426

9.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DI425.6 2DI426.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink/source, 8 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 8 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
Table 39: DI425 / DI426 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 8 Groups of Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay Typical Max. Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input (same group) Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes (optocoupler) Yes (optocoupler) No 10 ms 12 ms Max. 6 W B&R 2010 I/O module 324 Sink or source 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 6 mA 4 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V 1 ms 1.2 ms Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 DI425 DI426
308

9.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DI725.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 120/230 VAC, 50 ms, 8 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Limits 0-Signal UL 0-Signal IL Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Power Consumption Internal External Operating Characteristics Isolation Voltages under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Different Circuits Possible Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width 2500 VAC Yes (but not different phases) B&R 2010 I/O module 32 120 / 230 VAC 50 / 60 Hz 40 VAC Max. 15 mA Max. 50 ms Max. 50 ms Max. 4 W Max. 7 W Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 DI725
309

9.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DI825.6 2TB120.9 Short Description 2010 digital input module, 8 namur inputs, Ex(i),12 V, 12 mA, electrically isolated and intrinsically safe, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs No Load Voltage Maximum Values per Input Circuit 1) Max. Voltage Max. Current Max. Power Valid Connected Values for Ignition Protection [EEx ia] IIC Max. External Capacitance Max. External Inductance Internal Resistance Open Line Recognition Switching Range Hysteresis Short Circuit Recognition Switching Range Hysteresis Switching Threshold Switching Range Hysteresis Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Power Consumption B&R 2010 I/O module 8 8.05 V 5% 12 V 12 mA 36 mW In preparation BP200, BP201, BP210 DI825
0.5 F 2 mH Approx. 1 k 50 A to 350 A Typ. 0.15 mA 100 W to 360 Typ. 100 1.2 mA to 2.1 mA Typ. 0.5 mA Max. 100 s Max. 100 s Max. 11 W
310

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Intrinsically Safe Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes / max. peak value for nominal voltage: 375 V Yes / max. peak value for nominal voltage: 375 V Yes DI825

1) Maximum values per inpuit circuit according to IEC 60079-11.
9.8.3 General Information The DI825 module is used to transfer digital signals from areas where there is a danger of explosions to areas which are not hazardous. This area of application requires that the input circuit of the DI825 module corresponds to ignition protection standard [EEx ia] IIC. 9.8.4 Standards Met In addition to the standards conformed to by all B&R SYSTEM 2000 modules, the DI825 module also conforms to the European standards for "Electronic Equipment for Hazardous Locations (explosions)":
IEC 60079-0: 1977 + A1 ... A5 (VDE 0170/0171 part 1 withdrawn)

Electronic equipment for hazardous locations (explosions), general requirements
IEC 60079-11: 1977 + A1 ... A2 (VDE 0170/0171 part 1 withdrawn)

Electronic equipment for hazardous locations (explosions), intrinsic safety 'i'
Table 45: Standards for "Electronic Equipment for Hazardous Locations (explosions)"
311

Digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs. The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are: Number of outputs Type (relay, transistors) Switching voltage Continuous current
10.2 Protective circuit

The transistor output modules DO428 and DO430 have overload protection and an internal protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching of inductive loads without external inverse diodes.
10.3 Overview
Module Number of Outputs Type Switching Voltage Continuous Current DO428 32 Transistor 24 VDC Max. 0.5 A DO430 32 Transistor 24 VDC Max. 2 A DO600 32 Relay 24 VDC / 100 VAC Max. 2 A DO700 16 Relay 24 VDC / 230 VAC Max. 2 A DO710 16 Relay 30 VDC / 240 VAC Max. 4 A
Table 46: Digital output module overview
312

10.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DO428.6 2DO430.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 digital output module, 32 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 digital output module, 32 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 2 A, 4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
Table 47: DIO428 / DO430 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Total in 4 Groups of Design Switching Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Group Module Leakage Current when Switched Off Power Consumption Internal Terminal Side at 24 V Protection Characteristics Protective Circuit Internal External Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Switching Frequency (resistive load) Typ. 5 s / max. 110 s Typ. 60 s / max. 100 s Max. 500 Hz Max. 100 s Max. 100 s Yes Only if necessary (surge) Max. 0.5 A Max. 4 A Max. 16 A 0.3 mA Max. 5 W Max. 2 W per Group B&R 2010 I/O module 32 8 Transistor 18 VDC 24 VDC 30 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 12 A1) Max. 48 A Max. 1.5 mA Max. 2.9 W Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 DO428 DO430
313

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Group - Group Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes Yes No DO428 DO430

1) Maximum simultaneousness factor = 75%, 24 of the 32 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.
314

10.5.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description DO600 2DO600.6 2010 digital output module, 32 relay outputs 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A, 8 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps DO700 2DO700.6 2010 digital output module, 16 relay outputs 230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A, 4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps Image
2TB140.9
2TB120.9
10.5.2 Technical Data Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 315

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Outputs Total in 8/4 Groups of Design Switching Voltage Nominal Maximum Continuous Current per Output Group Module Switching Capacity Minimum Maximum Switching Frequency (nominal load) Power Consumption Protection Characteristics Short Circuit Protection External Protective Circuit Dynamic Characteristics Switching Delay Approx. 10 ms Fuse 10 A (at least 8 A) slow-blow per group Generally required Max. 8 W 120 VAC / 24 VDC 144 VAC / 30 VDC Max. 2 A Max. 8 A Max. 32 A 1 mA / 5 VDC 750 VA / 90 W Max. 10 Hz Max. 6 W 32 4 Relay / N.O. 230 VAC / 24 VDC 250 VAC / 30 VDC Max. 3 A Max. 8 A Max. 16 A 1 mA / 5 VDC 750 VA / 90 W B&R 2010 I/O module 16 4 Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 DO600 DO700

Product ID Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Group - Group Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes Yes No DO600 DO700
316

10.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 2DO710.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 digital output module, 16 relay outputs 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A, single channel isolated outputs, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number and Type of Outputs Rated Voltage Switching Voltage Range Rated Frequency Rated Current (1-Signal) Switching Capacity Wiring Power Consumption Internal External Protection Characteristics Type of Protection Short Circuit Protection AC DC Overvoltage Protection for Contacts DC Connection Dynamic Characteristics Output Delay for Signal Changes from log 0 - log 1 log 1 - log 0 Max. 13 ms (including chatter time) Max. 13 ms (including chatter time) B&R 2010 I/O module 8 change-over contacts / 8 normally open contacts, single channel isolation is provided 30 VDC / 240 VAC Min. 5 VDC at 1 mA DC or 45 - 63 Hz 4 A (resistive load) 2000 VA; 120 W at 30 VDC (resistive load) 8 change-over contacts / 8 normally open contacts Max. 7 W Max. 8 W Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 DO710
Fuse 8 A slow-blow (required externally) Fuse 4 A slow-blow (required externally) Limited to 460 V (required externally) Spark protection as required (to be connected externally)
317

Product ID Operating Characteristics Total Output Current Following Condition must be Fulfilled Cable Cross Section Isolation Voltages under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus Different Phases Possible Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Max. 64 A In 400 2.5 mm, for currents 4 A or if a recommanded value is reached 1 min 2800 VAC or 4 kV with 1.2 x 50 s pulse Yes, but only for 110 VAC DO710
318

Measured values (voltages, currents) are converted into numerical values which can be processed by the PLC using analog input modules. In the PLC, analog data is always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. Therefore, the resolution of the module used does not have to be taken into consideration when creating an application program. All analog input modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.
11.2 Overview
Module Number of Channels Input Signal Digital Converter Resolution AI300 16 10 V 12 Bit AI700 16 20 mA 13 Bit AI730 8 0 to 25 mA 16 Bit
319
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Analog Input Modules 11.3 AI300 / AI700

11.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2AI300.6 2AI700.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 analog input module, 16 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2010 analog input module, 16 inputs, +/-20 mA, 13 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
Table 54: AI300 / AI700 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Differential Input Resistance Load Voltage Drop at 20 mA Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes No Max. 9 W 16 -10 to +10 V -20 to +20 V 12 Bit 1 m 50 1V -20 to +20 mA -30 to +30 mA 13 Bit B&R 2010 I/O module Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 AI300 AI700
Table 55: AI300 / AI700 technical data
320

11.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 2AI730.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 - 25 mA, 16 bit, single channel isolation, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Input Type Number of Inputs Encoder Supply Voltage Current Common Potential between Channels Protection of all Channels against Incoming Voltage and Reverse Polarity Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Operating Voltage Channel to Ground Channel to Channel Channel to Shield Pulse Dielectric Strength at 2000 m above Sea Level Channel to Ground Channel to Channel Channel to Shield Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Max. 300 Veff Max. 600 Veff Max. 300 Veff B&R 2010 I/O module Current Signal 0 - 25 mA 8 18 - 30 VDC Max. 30 mA None (single channel isolation) Up to 42 VDC 16 Bit Max. 130 Max. 6 W + 1 W for each internally supplied encoder Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 AI730
4000 V 4000 V 2500 V
321

Analog output modules convert PLC internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numerical values which are to be converted must be in 16 bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independent of the resolution of the output module used. All analog output modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A converter is active.
12.2 Overview
Module Number of Outputs Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution AO300 16 10 V 12 Bit AO725 8 0 to 20 mA 12 Bit AO900 16 8 x 10 V 8 x 0 to 20 mA 12 Bit
Table 58: Analog output module overview
322
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Analog Output Modules 12.3 AO300 / AO725 / AO900
12.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2AO300.6 2AO725.6 2AO900.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 analog output module, 16 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2010 analog output module, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2010 analog output module, 8 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
Table 59: AO300 / AO725 / AO900 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Number of Outputs Voltage Outputs Current Outputs Output Signal Voltage Current Digital Converter Resolution Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Voltage Outputs Max. Load per Output Current Outputs Load Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width --Max. 600 Max. 600 10 mA (load 1 k) --10 mA (load 1 k) Yes No Max. 10 W 16 ----10 to +10 V ---Yes B&R 2010 I/O module BP200, BP201, BP210 ---8 ----0 to 20 mA 12 Bit Max. 10 W Max. 12 W 8 8 -10 to +10 V 0 to 20 mA AO300 AO725 AO900
Table 60: AO300 / AO725 / AO900 technical data
323

Temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed by the PLC using temperature modules. In the PLC, the number values are always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the temperature module does not have to be considered when creating the application program. For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1 steps. That means a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 C. The data format 0.1 C is supported by all temperature modules as standard. Some temperature modules can also be switched to other formats. All temperature modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.
13.2 Overview
Module Number of Channels Measurement Range Sensor Resolution AT300 8 -50 to +450 C PT100 / 3-line 20000 steps AT610 16 -200 to +950 C / -200 to +1,300 C FeCuNi sensor (Type J + L) NiCrNi sensor (Type K) Internal >14 bits
Table 61: Temperature module overview
324

13.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2AT300.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 analog input module, 8 inputs, PT100 (3-line connection), -50 to +450 degrees C, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Total in 2 Groups of Sensor Type Connection Standard Measurement Range Internal Resolution Measurement Current Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group - Group Input - Input Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width Yes Yes No B&R 2010 I/O module 8 inputs - resistance measurement 4 PT100 3-line connection IEC/EN 60751 -50 to +450 C 20000 steps 2 mA (0.2 %) Max. 9 W Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 AT300
325

13.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 2AT610.6 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 analog input module, 16 inputs, temperature sensor, type L/J/K, -200 to +1300 degrees C, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Backplane Static Characteristics Module Type Number of Inputs Input Groups Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Input Signal Nominal Allowed Input Impedance in Signal Range Digital Converter Resolution Temperature Measurement of the Internal Compensation Reference Junction Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Group 1 - Group 3 Group 2 - Group 4 Groups 1+3 - Groups 2+4 Input - Input (same group) Max. Modulation Comapred to Ground Potential Between 2 Electrically Isolated Groups Yes No No Yes No 50 V 50 V B&R 2010 I/O module 16 differential inputs for thermocouples 4 groups Channels 1 -4 Channels 5 - 8 Channels 9 -12 Channels 13 -16 15 to +55 mV -20 to +20 V >1 M Internal >14 bit (23841 internal ADC converter values in 20 ms) 1) Temperature profile measurement on the module using four temperature sensors Compensation temperature measured separately for each channel Max. 8 W Yes BP200, BP201, BP210 AT610
326

Product ID Sensor Setting for Sensor Type Type Type Standard Measurement Voltage Range 2) Measurement Range Step Size Linearization Compensation Measurement Internal External (adjustable) Raw Value Measurement Setting Standardization Measurement Voltage Range Measurement Range Linearization Compensation Measurement Internal External AT600 Operation Sensor Sort Type Standard Measurement Range in Steps of 0.1 C Linearization Terminal Temperature Compensation Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width FeCuNi L DIN 43710 -50.0 to +750.0 C Yes -20 to +90 C from internal compensation measurement Individually for each group Standardized to 2 V -15 to +55 mV Depends on sensor type in CPU Can be read ---FeCuNi L DIN 43710 -8.15 to 53.14 mV -200.0 to +900.0 C Individually for each group FeCuNi J DIN IEC 584 -7.89 to 54.95 mV -200.0 to +950.0 C 0.1 C Yes -20 to +90 C -100 to +200 C NiCrNi K DIN IEC 584 -5.891 to 52.398 mV -200.0 to +1,300.0 C AT610
1) The internal resolution is different depending on the measurement time, but the converter value is always scaled to 20 ms. This prevents a value from being changed when the measurement time is changed! 2) Standardized to 0 C compensation temperature.
327
14. Other Modules

The universal mixed module is a combination of digital input/output modules and analog input/output modules. The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs. A status LED labeled "RUN" indicates that D/A and A/D conversion is active.
Module Digital Inputs Number of Inputs Nominal Input Voltage Switching Delay Digital Outputs Number of Outputs Switching Voltage Continuous Current Analog Inputs Number of Inputs Input Signal 1) Digital Converter Resolution Analog Outputs Number of Outputs Output Signal 2) Digital Converter Resolution 1) Measurement range can be set with software 2) Voltage/current according to the connection 10 V 12 Bit 2 0 to 20 mA 11 Bit 10 V 12 Bit 4 0 to 20 mA 12 Bit 8 24 VDC 0.5 A 8 24 VDC 1 ms UM900
Table 66: General information concerning other modules
328
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Other Modules 14.2 UM900

14.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 2UM900.6 Short Description 2010 universal mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms, 8 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, 2 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 2 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 11 bit, Order terminal block separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
2TB140.9
Table 67: UM900 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Inputs/Outputs Power Consumption Operating Characteristics Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Output - PLC Group 1 - Group 2 Analog - Digital Digital Inputs Amount Total in 2 Groups of Rated Voltage Wiring Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Input Current at Nominal Voltage Digital Outputs Amount Total in 2 Groups of Design Rated Current 8 4 Transistor 0.5 A 8 4 24 VDC Sink Typ. 1 ms / max. 1.2 ms Typ. 1 ms / max. 1.2 ms 5 mA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B&R 2010 I/O module BP200, BP201, BP210 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs 4 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs Max. 8 W UM900
Table 68: UM900 technical data
329

Product ID Rated Voltage Switching Voltage Range Leakage Current (0 signal) Wiring Protective Circuit Short Circuit and Overload Protection Delay 0 to 1 Delay 1 to 0 Total Output Current Analog Inputs Amount Measurement Ranges 1) Digital Converter Resolution Input Impedance in Signal Range Analog Outputs Amount Output Signal 2) Digital Converter Resolution Load Impedance Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 single width 2 10 V 12 Bit Min. 1 k 0 to 20 mA 11 Bit Max. 600 Approx. 1 M 10 V 12 Bit 50 4 0 to 20 mA UM900 24 VDC 18 - 30 VDC 0.3 mA Source External only if necessary (surge) Yes Typ. 5 s / max. 110 s Typ. 60 s / max. 100 s 4A
Table 68: UM900 technical data (cont.)

1) Measurement range can be set using software. 2) Signal corresponds to connection.
330

15.1 Overview
Module IF100 IF101 Description 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 ETHERNET connection, BNC socket, electrically isolated, network capable 2010 PROFIBUS network module, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connecting to PROFIBUS networks
NW100
331
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Communication Modules 15.2 IF100 / IF101

15.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Interface Modules 2IF100.60-1 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 ETHERNET connection, BNC socket, electrically isolated, network capable Accessories 0G0001.00-090 7AC911.9 0AC912.9 0AC913.92 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Bus connector, CAN Bus adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
2IF101.60-1
Table 70: IF100 / IF101 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption Processor Section Dual Ported RAM (DPR) User RAM System RAM PROM User PROM System PROM Application Interface IF1 Type Design Electrical Isolation Controller Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Capable Application Interface IF2 Type Interface Selection Design Electrical Isolation RS232/TTY Using software 9 pin D-type plug Yes RS232 9 pin D-type plug No RISC (68302) 15 m / 19200 Baud 64 kBaud No 64 KByte SRAM (not buffered) 404 KByte SRAM (not buffered) 108 KByte SRAM (not buffered) 256 KByte FlashPROM 256 KByte FlashPROM Yes B&R 2010 system module, single width BP101, BP110 Max. 7 W IF100 IF101
Table 71: IF100 / IF101 technical data
332

Product ID Controller Maximum Distance RS232 TTY Maximum Baudrate RS232 TTY Bus Capable Application Interface IF3 Type Interface Selection Design Electrical Isolation Controller Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Capable Bus Coupling Application Interface IF4 Type Design Electrical Isolation Controller Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m Bus Capable Bus Coupling Application Interface IF5 (only IF101) Type Design Electrical Isolation Controller Maximum Baudrate Bus Capable Bus Coupling --------------ETHERNET 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket Yes AM79C960 10 MBit/s Yes Coax-T CAN 9 pin D-type plug Yes Intel Controller 82527 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes T-connector (model number 7AC911.9) RS485/RS422 Using software 9 pin D-type socket Yes RISC (68302) 1,200 m 347 kBaud Yes T-connector (model number 0G1000.00-090) IF100 RISC (68302) 15 m / 19200 Baud 300 m 64 kBaud 64 kBaud No IF101
Table 71: IF100 / IF101 technical data (cont.)
333
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Communication Modules 15.3 NW100

15.3.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description PROFIBUS network module 2NW100.50-1 2010 PROFIBUS network module, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connecting to PROFIBUS networks Accessories 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
Table 72: NW100 order data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption Peripherals Diagnosis LEDs Number Switch Standard Communication Interface Interface Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 9.6 kBit/s 19.2 kBit/s 93.75 kBit/s 187.5 kBit/s 500 kBit/s PROFIBUS Data Transfer Protocol Access Procedure Number of Stations TopologyCoupling to Bus Transfer Media 2 x RS485 2 x 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m According to PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245 parts 1 and 2 Token passing principle with underlying master/slave principle Max. 127 (with repeater) Physical bus Direct Shielded, twisted pair Yes Four - used to set the module address, station address and baudrate Yes B&R 2010 system module, single width BP101, BP110 Max. 15 W NW100
Table 73: NW100 technical data
334

16.1 Overview
Module NC303 Description 2010 ultrasonic transducer module, 1 pulse encoder input, 700 Hz, 24 VDC, 4 ultrasonic transducer inputs, 56 MHz, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink, 4 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 1 A, 4 analog inputs 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 5 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal blocks separately!
335

16.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 2NC303.60-1 Short Description 2010 ultrasonic transducer module, 1 pulse encoder input, 700 Hz, 24 VDC, 4 ultrasonic transducer inputs, 56 MHz, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink, 4 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 1 A, 4 analog inputs 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 5 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal blocks separately! 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
2TB140.9
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Module Type Backplane Power Consumption Processor Section Communication Instruction Cycle Time Dual Ported RAM (DPR) System RAM Encoder Supply Ultrasonic Transducer with Differential Signals Supply Encoder Supply Voltage Load Pulse Encoder Supply Pulse Encoder Input Use Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Pulse Frequency For RPM measurement (pulse counting and gate measurement) 24 VDC 30 VDC 4.5 k <5 V 5 to 15 V >15 V Max. 700 Hz Internal 24 V 10 % Max. 160 mA External RISC 0.8 s 384 Byte SRAM (not buffered) 256 KByte SRAM (not buffered) Yes B&R 2010 I/O module BP200, BP201, BP210 21 W +1.5 x encoder power NC303
336

Product ID Gate Measurement Resolution Electrical Isolation Channels for Path Measurement Encoder Type Number of Channels Input Resistance Two Magnet Measurement Input and Output Signals Internal Counter Frequency Counter Size Start Pulse Duration Pulse Ignored after Start Pulse Path Measurement Resolution Electrical Isolation Channel - PLC Channel - Channel Analog Inputs Amount Input Signal Nominal Min./Max. Digital Converter Resolution Differential Input Resistance Electrical Isolation Input PLC Input Input Analog Outputs Amount Output Signal Digital Converter Resolution Max. Load per Output Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Digital Inputs Amount Wiring Input Voltage Nominal Maximum Input Current at Nominal Voltage Input Resistance Switching Threshold LOW Range Switching Range HIGH Range Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Electrical Isolation Input - PLC Input - Input Digital Outputs Amount Design Wiring Supply Voltage (external) Nominal Maximum 4 Transistor Sink 24 VDC 30 VDC 4 Sink 24 VDC 30 VDC Approx. 5.7 mA 1.5 k <5 V 5 to 11 V >11 V 10 ms 10 ms Yes (optocoupler) No 5 voltage outputs -10 V to +10 V 12 Bit 10 mA (load 1 k ) Yes (optocoupler) No 4 voltage inputs 0 to +10 V -20 V to +20 V 12 Bit >900 k Yes (optocoupler) No Ultrasonic transducer with start/stop interface (differential signal) 4 500 Only possible for 1 channel Differential Level 56 MHz (positive edge) 21 Bit Approx. 1 s Approx. 18 s 0.05 mm (ultrasonic speed = 2800 m/s) Yes (optocoupler) No NC303 7.69 s Yes (optocoupler)
337

Product ID Continuous Current per Output Residual Voltage of Transistors Overload and Short Circuit Protection 1) Switching Delay log. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0 Switching Frequency (resistive load) Electrical Isolation Output - PLC Output - Output Mechanical Characteristics Dimensions B&R 2010 double width NC303 Max. 1 A Max. 0.5 V (at 1 A) Polymer PTC protection device (Polyswitch) 2) Entry for resistive load 100 s 100 s Max. 500 Hz Yes (optocoupler) No

1) Every digital output uses a Polymer PTC protection device for overload and short circuit protection. If an overload or short circuit occurs, the protective element becomes highly resistive and breaks the flow of current. In order to activate the output again, the external supply must be turned off and the error (overload or short circuit) must be removed. After a reset time >10 seconds, the protective element returns to the conductive state. 2) Polyswitch is a registered trademark of RAYCHEM.
16.2.3 General Information The intelligent I/O processor module NC303 is a programmable I/O module with four channels for path measurement, and one channel for RPM measurement (RPM measurement using pulse counting and gate measurement). When software is installed, the processor in the path processor carries out the path measurement (with plausibility check) and the RPM measurement. The data from the path and RPM measurements is stored in DPR (Dual Port RAM) and can be read cyclically by the PLC CPU. Parameters for path and RPM measurement can be defined by the user with function blocks. The respective software (including software documentation) can be obtained from B&R.
338
17. Accessories
17.1 Overview
Model Number 2BM100.9 2TB120.9 2TB140.9 Description 2010 dummy module 2010 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps
Table 77: Accessory overview
339
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Accessories 17.2 BM100

17.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 2BM100.9 Short Description 2010 dummy module Image
Table 78: BM100 order data
17.2.2 General Information Dummy modules are used to fill slots which are not needed. We recommend that you fill all unused slots with dummy modules.
340
B&R SYSTEM 2010 Accessories 17.3 TB120 / TB140

17.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 2TB120.9 2TB140.9 Short Description 2010 terminal block, 20 pin, screw clamps 2010 terminal block, 40 pin, screw clamps Image
TB120 TB140
Table 79: TB120 / TB140 order data

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Terminal / Terminal Left / Right Row Creeping Distance Terminal / Terminal Left / Right Row Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Dielectric Strength Terminal / Terminal Left / Right Row Wire Cross Section Cable Type Removal Stress Relief >5 kV 5 kV 0.20 mm (AWG24) 2.5 mm (AWG12) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) Mechanical Using cable tie 10.16 mm 6.38 mm 8.28 mm 4.5 mm 250 VAC Max. 12 A / contact 3.5 kV 5 kV TB120 20 Screw clamps 5.08 mm 6.38 mm 3.2 mm 4.5 mm TB140 40
Table 80: TB120 / TB140 technical data

17.3.3 General Information This double row terminal block is used for most modules in the B&R SYSTEM 2010 controller family. Six position mechanical coding for each individual terminal block prevents accidentally switching neighboring terminal blocks e.g. after service. A patented lever mechanism is used to remove the terminal block. This eases use, even for 40 pin terminal blocks. To prevent damage, stress relief is provided forthe I/O cable.
341
18. Manuals
18.1 Overview
Model Number MASYS22010-0 MASYS22010-E Description B&R 2010 User Manual, German B&R 2010 User Manual, English
Table 81: Manual Overview
342
B&R Logic Scanner Module Overview
1. Module Overview
Product ID Description CPUs LS251 Logic Scanner CPU LS251, 32 bit half size PCI card, 2 MB DRAM, 1 MB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 remote I/O master (RS485), 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable Communication Modules LS071 LS079 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, supplied by ext. 24 VDC power supply Manuals ----Logic Scanner LS251 Users Manual, German Logic Scanner LS251 Users Manual, English MASYS2LS-0 MASYS2LS-E 354 354 5LS071.9 5LS079.9 350 352 5LS251.60-1 346 Model No. Page
Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner module overview
343
B&R Logic Scanner General Information
An increasing number of open and closed loop control processes use a hardware neutral PC for visualization. The process data is collected in a central controller and transferred to the PC using a point-to-point or network connection. When using the Logic Scanner CPU LS251, the controller no longer has to handle the data collection process. The CPU is a PCI bus insert card which can be operated in any PC with a PCI bus slot. The card is equipped with a powerful, highly integrated PLC CPU. This CPU executes the entire control program. Therefore, a remote CPU in the PLC rack is no longer necessary. Connections to inputs and outputs in the field are made via a CAN field bus or a remote I/O bus. The master function is handled by the LS251.
2.1 B&R PLC Operating System

The use of a powerful processor on the CPU LS251 allows the control program to be executed completely independent of the performance requirements for visualization. The B&R PLC operating system guarantees stabile, real-time capable and deterministic multitasking which is not influenced by the operating status of the visualization software or the PC operating system. The Logic Scanner CPU LS251 is not affected by a software reset triggered with [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Del] or if the PC comes to a standstill. 2.1.1 Compatibility Programming is fully compatible to B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 systems. Therefore, existing programs can be used directly. 2.1.2 High Performance The integration of the CPU and field bus connections for CAN and remote I/O on an insert card also guarantees the highest level of performance when accessing remote inputs and outputs. Short cycle times up to 1 ms are possible. 2.1.3 Powerful Visualization The visualization unit can access process data very fast via the PCI bus. Delays during screen regeneration no longer occur. 2.1.4 Additional Interfaces The LS071 or LS079 expansion cards increase the interface possibilities by providing an RS232 and a CAN interface. The expansion cards are connected to the CPU LS251 using a ribbon cable. 2.1.5 External Power Supply for the Logic Scanner CPU LS251 The LS079 expansion card enables the LS251 to use an external 24 VDC power supply. The supply is then fully independent of the PC.
344
B&R Logic Scanner CPUs
3. CPUs
3.1 Overview
Module LS251 Description Logic Scanner CPU LS251, 32 bit half size PCI card, 2 MB DRAM, 1 MB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 remote I/O master (RS485), 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable
345
B&R Logic Scanner CPUs 3.2 LS251

3.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description CPU 5LS251.60-1 Logic Scanner CPU LS251, 32 bit half size PCI card, 2 MB DRAM, 1 MB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 remote I/O master (RS485), 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable Accessories 0G0001.00-090 0AC201.9 0G1000.00-090 0AC916.9 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply: 120 / 230 VAC Image
The CPU LS251 is delivered with a lithium battery.
Table 3: LS251 order data
The following expansion cards are available for the Logic Scanner CPU LS251:
Model Number 5LS071.9 5LS079.9 Short Description Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, ext. 24 VDC power supply
Table 4: LS251 expansion card order data
User's manuals see section "Manuals". 3.2.2 Technical Data

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Design Power Consumption Without Expansion Card With LS071 With LS079 Operating Temperature Processor Section Processor Architecture Typical Instruction Cycle Time Data and Program Code Cache Standard Memory RAM System RAM User RAM System PROM User PROM Data Buffering Backup Battery Battery Monitoring Buffer Duration Peripherals Real-time Clock Resolution Status Display Interface Expansion Application Interface IF1 Nonvolatile 1s LEDs With expansion card LS071 or LS079 in neighboring slot, 1 x CAN, 1 x RS232 32 Bit 0.2 s 2 x 256 Byte 2 MByte DRAM 174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 512 KByte FlashPROM Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh Yes Min. 4 years Yes PCI Half Size Card Plug & Play Max. 7.75 W Max. 8.5 W Max. 13 W 0 - 55 C LS251
Table 5: LS251 technical data
346

Product ID Type Design Electrical Isolation Baudrates 100 kBit/s 181 kBit/s 500 kBit/s 1000 kBit/s 2000 kBit/s Access Procedure Number of Slaves Are Intelligent Slaves Possible with CPU Protocol Handling Transfer Time Topology Connection to the Bus Transfer Media Network Capable Termination Resistance Application Interface IF2 Type Electrical Isolation Design Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m Multi-master Capable Number of Stations Controller Priority Protocol Transfer Media Network Capable Termination Resistance CAN Yes 4 pin multipoint connector 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes Max. 64 (without repeater) Controller 82527 Using object identifier According to CiA/CAL 4 conductor shielded cable, twisted pair Yes Optional (externally wired) LS251 Remote I/O Master (RS485) 9 pin D-type socket Yes Depends on the distance Max. 1,200 m Max. 1,000 m Max. 400 m Max. 200 m Max. 100 m Master-slave principle Max. 31 (without repeater) Yes With separate processor 897 s for 64 digital I/O and 16 analog I/O Physical bus Direct Shielded, twisted pair Yes External
Table 5: LS251 technical data (cont.)
3.2.3 Buffering the RAM Chapter 5 B&R Logic Scanner Buffering RAM (program and data memory) and nonvolatile operation of the real-time clock are guaranteed by the lithium battery provided. 3.2.4 PC Resources PCI Bus The CPU LS251 is an insert card for the PCI bus. The following points are important features of the PCI bus: Fast data transfer 33 MHz transfer frequency 32 bit data bus Plug & Play
Plug & Play The Plug & Play technology eases installation of the insert card. BIOS recognizes the PCI modules while booting and assigns their physical addresses. If a module is removed or added, no setting have to be made by the user.
347

Interrupt The CPU LS251 uses an interrupt. It is automatically assigned by the Plug & Play technology while booting. Memory The memory is automatically assigned while booting. The following memory areas are used by the CPU LS251:
Memory Size 1 x 1 MByte 1 x 2 MByte Memory Area Extended Memory (>1 MByte) Extended Memory (>1 MByte)
Table 6: LS251 memory
348
B&R Logic Scanner Communication Modules
4.1 Overview
Model Number 5LS071.9 5LS079.9 Description Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS079, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, Supplied by an ext. 24 VDC power supply
349
B&R Logic Scanner Communication Modules 4.2 LS071

4.2.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Expansion Card 5LS071.9 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
User's manuals see section "Manuals".

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Design Supply Power Consumption Operating Temperature Application Interface IF3 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interface IF4 Type Electrical Isolation IF4 - LS071 IF3 - IF4 Design Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m Multi-master Capable Number of Stations CAN Yes Yes 4 pin multipoint connector 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes Max. 64 RS232 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 Yes Inserted mechanically in the slot next to the Logic Scanner CPU, but does not make contact to the PCI or ISA slot From the CPU LS251 via a ribbon cable Including LS251 max. 8.5 W 0 - 55 C LS071
350

Product ID Controller Priority Protocol Transfer Media Network Capable Termination Resistance LS071 Controller 82527 Using object identifier According to CiA/CAL 4 conductor shielded cable, twisted pair Yes Optional (externally wired)
Table 9: LS071 technical data (cont.)
4.2.3 General Information The CPU LS251 is equipped with field bus connections for CAN and remote I/O. The LS071 expansion card increases the interface possibilities by providing an RS232 and a CAN interface. The module is connected to the LS251 using a ribbon cable.
351
B&R Logic Scanner Communication Modules 4.3 LS079

4.3.1 Order Data
Model Number Short Description Expansion Card 5LS079.9 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, supplied by ext. 24 VDC power supply Accessories 0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Image
User's manuals see section "Manuals".

Product ID General Information C-UL-US Listed Design Supply External Internal External Supply Voltage Range Rated Voltage Fuse Power Consumption of the LS079 and LS251 External Supply Supplied via the PC Operating Temperature Application Interface IF3 Type Controller FIFO Design Electrical Isolation Input Filter / Protective Circuit Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Handshake Lines Network Capable Data Formats Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Application Interface IF4 Type Electrical Isolation IF4 - LS079 IF3 - IF4 Design CAN Yes Yes 4 pin multipoint connector RS232 UART Type ST16C650 32 bytes in send and receive direction 9 pin D-type plug No Yes 15 m / 19200 Baud 115.2 kBaud RTS, CTS No 5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd 1/2 In preparation Inserted mechanically in the slot next to the Logic Scanner CPU, but does not make contact to the PCI or ISA slot Using a 24 VDC power supply From the CPU LS251 via a ribbon cable 18 - 30 VDC 24 VDC Internal: 1.5 A Picofuse LS079
Max. 13 W Max. 13 W 0 - 55 C
352

Product ID Maximum Distance Maximum Baudrate Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m Multi-master Capable Number of Stations Controller Priority Protocol Transfer Media Network Capable Termination Resistance LS079 1,000 m 500 kBit/s 250 kBit/s 50 kBit/s Yes Max. 64 Controller 82527 Using object identifier According to CiA/CAL 4 conductor shielded cable, twisted pair Yes Optional (externally wired)
4.3.3 General Information The CPU LS251 is equipped with field bus connections for CAN and remote I/O. The LS079 expansion card increases the interface possibilities by providing an RS232 and a CAN interface. The module is connected to the LS251 using a ribbon cable. 4.3.4 External Power Supply for the CPU LS251 The LS079 expansion card enables the LS251 to use an external 24 VDC power supply. The power supply is connected to the LS079. The LS251 supply is connected using a special cable. The supply is then fully independent of the PC. If the external power supply fails, the CPU and expansion card are supplied by the internal PC power supply (redundant supply).
353
B&R Logic Scanner Manuals
5. Manuals
5.1 Overview
Model Number MASYS2LS-0 MASYS2LS-E Description Logic Scanner LS251 User's Manual, German Logic Scanner LS251 User's Manual, English
354
Accessories Overview
1. Overview
Model Number 0AC001.9 0AC171.9 0AC200.9 0AC201.9 0AC401.9 0AC410.9 0AC912.9 0AC913.92 0AC916.9 0G0001.00-090 0G0010.00-090 0G0012.00-090 0G1000.00-090 0MC111.9 0MC211.9 7AC911.9 0TB124.91 7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 7TB712.9 7TB712.91 7TB712:90-02 7TB712:91-02 7TB718.9 7TB718.91 7TB718:90-02 7TB718:91-02 ECINT1-1 ECINT1-11 Description Retaining Clips (500 pieces) Glass tube fuses 5 x 20 mm, 20 pcs., 3.15 A T / 250 V Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, cylindrical battery Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell Encoder 5 V - 24 V, converter for 5 V encoders (abs. or incr.) Interface Converter TTY - RS232 Bus Adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Bus Adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable Bus Termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM Bus Connector, CAN Accessory, terminal block, 2x12 pin, cage clamps, 1.0 mm2 Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 18 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, without lightning protection RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, with lightning protection Page --------356 356 357 358 359 ------359 ----360 361 362 362 362 362 362 363 363 363 364 364 364 364 365 365
Table 1: General accessories overview
355
Accessories General Accessories
2. General Accessories
2.1 AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V
2.1.1 Order Data
Model Number 0AC401.9 Short Description Encoder 5 V - 24 V, converter for 5 V encoders (abs. or incr.) Image
Table 2: AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V order data
2.1.2 General Information The adapter is used as a converter for 5 V encoders. The 5 V differential signals delivered by the encoder are converted to 24 V signals. Absolute and incremental encoders can be used.
2.2 AC410 Interface Converter

2.2.1 Order Data
Model Number 0AC410.9 Short Description Interface Converter TTY - RS232 Image
Table 3: AC410 interface converter order data
2.2.2 General Information The AC410 interface converter is used to convert a TTY signal into an RS232 signal or an RS232 signal into a TTY signal. To be able to connect simple PANELWARE operator panels (e.g. P120 or P121), the 24 V supply voltage is converted into a 5 V output voltage. This voltage can be loaded with up to 0.5 A. The maximum baudrate is 19200 Baud.
356
Accessories General Accessories 2.3 AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x

2.3.1 Order Data
Model Number 0AC912.9 Short Description Bus Adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface Image
Table 4: AC912 bus adapter, CAN 1x, order data
2.3.2 General Information The CAN bus adapters is used to connect a controller to a CAN network. The network connection is made using the 6 pin terminal block. The connection to the controller is made using the 9 pin D-type socket. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus adapter. The terminating resistor can be turned on or off. The cable from the controller to the bus adapter is not in the B&R product line. It must be constructed by the customer.
357
Accessories General Accessories 2.4 AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x

2.4.1 Order Data
Model Number 0AC913.92 Short Description Bus Adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable Image
Table 5: AC913 bus adapter, CAN 2x, order data
2.4.2 General Information The CAN bus adapters is used to connect a controller to a CAN network. The network connection is made using the 9 pin D-type plug (C1) and the 9 pin D-type socket (C2). The 6 pin terminal block has a 30 cm long cable with a D-type housing attached. This cable is used to make the connection to the controller. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus adapter. The terminating resistor can be turned on or off.
358
Accessories General Accessories 2.5 AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active

2.5.1 Order Data
Model Number 0AC916.9 Short Description Bus Termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC Image
Table 6: AC916 bus termination , RS485 active order data
2.5.2 General Information An active bus termination is available for PROFIBUS networks and remote I/O. The active bus termination allows the network to be terminated independent of the supply for the communication modules. The supply voltage for the active bus termination is 120 / 230 VAC.
2.6 RS485 Bus Connector

2.6.1 Order Data
Model Number 0G1000.00-090 Short Description Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O Image
Table 7: RS485 bus connector order data
2.6.2 General Information The RS485 bus connector is used to connect a controller to remote I/O, in a PROFIBUS network or in a RS485 network. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus connector. The terminating resistor can be turned on or off.
359
Accessories General Accessories 2.7 AC911 Bus Connector, CAN

2.7.1 Order Data
Model Number 7AC911.9 Short Description Bus Connector, CAN Image
Table 8: AC911 bus connector, CAN order data

Product ID Lines Termination Resistance Stress Relief AC911 Connections for two bus lines 120 - can be switched on Built-in
Table 9: AC911 bus connector, CAN technical data
2.7.3 General Information The bus connector enables you to: Exchange a CAN node without shutting down the network since the connection is not broken, Change the termination resistance quickly and easily (e.g. if the last node in a network is removed).
360
Accessories General Accessories 2.8 TB124 24 Pin Terminal Block

2.8.1 Order Data
Model Number 0TB124.91 Short Description Accessory, terminal block, 2x12 pin, cage clamps, 1.0 mm2 Image
Table 10: TB124 24 pin terminal block order data

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Wire Cross Section Cable Type TB124 24 2-row cage clamp terminal block 3.5 mm 50 V Max. 5 A / contact 0.5 mm - 1 mm Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!)
Table 11: TB124 24 pin terminal block technical data

1) Observe the respective limit data for the I/O modules!
361

2.9.1 Order Data
Model Number 7TB710.9 7TB710.91 7TB710:90-01 7TB710:91-01 Short Description Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps Image
TB710.9
TB710.91

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Resistance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Wire Cross Section Cable Type Removal TB710 10 Screw or cage clamps 5.08 mm 6 mW 250 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.14 mm (AWG26) - 2.5 mm (AWG12) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) Mechanical
Table 13: TB710 10 Pin Terminal Block

2.9.3 General Information This single row 10 pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module.
362

2.10.1 Order Data
TB712.9
TB712.91

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) TB712 12 Screw or cage clamps 3.5 mm 125 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.08 mm (AWG28) - 1.5 mm (AWG16) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) Mechanical
Wire Cross Section Cable Type Removal

2.10.3 General Information This single row 12 pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. Removal is simplified by two ejection levers on the terminal block.
363

2.11.1 Order Data
TB718.9
TB718.91

Product ID Number of Pins Type of Terminal Distance between Contacts Nominal Voltage Current Load 1) Wire Cross Section Cable Type Removal TB718 18 Screw or cage clamps 3.5 mm 125 V Max. 12 A / contact 0.08 mm (AWG28) - 1.5 mm (AWG16) Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!) Mechanical

2.11.3 General Information This single row 18 pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. Removal is simplified by two ejection levers on the terminal block.
364
Accessories General Accessories 2.12 INT1 Interface Converter

2.12.1 Order Data
Model Number ECINT1-1 ECINT1-11 Short Description RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, without lightning protection RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, with lightning protection Image
Table 18: INT1 interface converter order data
2.12.2 General Information The INT1 interface converter is used to convert RS232 interface signals to an RS485 signal level. It is used if: Data transfer over a long distance is required which cannot be bridged by an RS232 interface. The distance between two stations can be max. 5000 m when using shielded RS485 cables. Electrical isolation is required for the interface. A PLC is to be connected to a network using an RS232 interface.
The interface converter INT1 has lightning protection. 2.12.3 Supply The INT1 interface converter requires an external 24 VDC supply voltage. Current consumption can be max. 400 mA.
365
Accessories General Accessories
366
Standards and Certifications Standards and Limits Used
Chapter 7 Standards and Certifications
1. Standards and Limits Used

The product standard IEC 61131-2 is generally valid for B&R industrial products. The following standards provide a detailed definition of proper functionality in a typical industrial environment (charged with electromagnetic energy):
Standard IEC 50081-2 IEC 61000-6-4 IEC 50082-2 IEC 61000-6-2 EN 55022/CISPR 22 EN 55024/CISPR 22 IEC 60204-1 EN 60950/CISPR 22 IEC 61000-3-2 IEC 61000-3-3 IEC 61131-2 IEC 61800-3 UL 508 Description Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic standard - emission standard Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 50081-2 will be replaced by IEC 61000-6-4) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Generic standard, emission standard Part 2: Industrial environments (EN 50082-2 has been replaced by EN/IEC 61000-6-2) Information technology equipment - radio disturbance characteristics - limits and measuring procedures Information technology equipment - immunity characteristics - limits and testing procedures Safety of machinery - electrical equipment on machines - Part 1: General requirements Safety of information technology equipment Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits; Section 2: Limits for harmonic currents in low voltage systems Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits; Section 3: Limits for voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage systems Programmable logic controllers - Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests Adjustable speed electric drives - Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods Industrial Control Equipment, (UL = Underwriters Laboratories)
1.1 Limits
IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61131-2 (Ed. 2) Contact discharge to powder-coated and bare metal parts Air discharge to plastic parts IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic Fields Housing, completely wired IEC 61000-4-4 Burst, Fast Transients IEC 61131-2 (Ed. 2) Supply lines All other lines IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Limits CM, unsymmetrical AC power supplies DC power supplies Digital and analog I/O, AC, unshielded AC auxiliary voltage outputs for sensors, etc. Digital and analog I/O, DC, unshielded Data lines, unshielded DC auxiliary voltage outputs for sensors, etc. All shielded lines 2 kV (42 ) 0.5 kV (42 ) 1 kV (42 ) 0.5 kV (42 ) 2 kV (12 ) 1 kV (12 ) Limits DM, symmetrical 1 kV (2 ) 0.5 kV (2 ) 2 kV, 1 min 1 kV, 1 min B&R Limit Value 4 kV, 5 min 2 kV, 5 min 80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m, 80 % amplitude modulation with 1 kHz 4 kV 8 kV B&R Limit Value 8 kV 15 kV
1 kV (2 )
---
367
Chapter 7 Standards and Certifications
Standards and Certifications Standards and Limits Used

IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted Disturbances (radio frequency) Network I/O Signal connections >10 m Functional ground IEC 60664-1 Pollution Degree Pollution degree 2: non-conductive material IEC 60068-2-6, Test Fc Vibration Test Frequency Range [Hz] 10 f < 57 57 f 150 f > 150 Continuous 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.5 g constant acceleration not defined IEC 60068-2-27, Test Ea Shock Test 15 g over 11 ms, half sine wave in all three perpendicular axes. Periodic 0.075 mm amplitude 1 g constant acceleration not defined 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, (in broadcast range 3 V) 80 % amplitude modulation with 1 kHz
1.2 International Standards

B&R products and services comply with all applicable standards. These are international standards from organizations such as ISO, IEC and CENELEC, as well as national standards of organizations such as UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, VE, etc. We give special consideration to the reliability of our products in an industrial environment. Therefore, e.g. the requirements of product standard IEC 61131-2 concerning electromagnetic immunity are exceeded considerably.
Certifications USA and Canada All important B&R products are tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and are checked quarterly by a UL inspector. This mark is valid for the USA and Canada and eases certification of your machines and systems in these areas.
Europe
All harmonized EN standards for the valid guidelines are met.
Russian Federation
GOST-R certification is available for the export of all B&R products in the Russian Federation.
The entire B&R SYSTEM 2005 is certified by Bureau Veritas. Bureau Veritas is one of the largest organizations in the world for classifying ships, drilling platforms, etc.
368
Index
Numerics
0AC001.9 ..................................................................... 355 0AC171.9 ..................................................................... 355 0AC200.9 ..................................................................... 355 0AC201.9 ..................................................................... 355 0AC240.9 ..................................................................... 256 0AC401.9 ..................................................................... 356 0AC410.9 ..................................................................... 356 0AC912.9 ..................................................................... 357 0AC913.92 ................................................................... 358 0AC916.9 ..................................................................... 359 0G0001.00-090 ............................................................ 355 0G0010.00-090 ............................................................ 355 0G0012.00-090 ............................................................ 355 0G1000.00-090 ............................................................ 359 0G2001.00-090 ............................................................ 257 0MC111.9 ..................................................................... 355 0MC211.9 ..................................................................... 355 0TB124.91 .................................................................... 361 2AI300.6 ....................................................................... 320 2AI700.6 ....................................................................... 320 2AI730.6 ....................................................................... 321 2AO300.6 ..................................................................... 323 2AO725.6 ..................................................................... 323 2AO900.6 ..................................................................... 323 2AT300.6 ...................................................................... 325 2AT610.6 ...................................................................... 326 2BM100.9 ..................................................................... 340 2BP101.3 ..................................................................... 278 2BP110.3 ..................................................................... 278 2BP200.4 ..................................................................... 278 2BP201.4 ..................................................................... 278 2BP202.4 ..................................................................... 278 2BP210.4 ..................................................................... 278 2BP300.4 ..................................................................... 278 2CP100.60-1 ................................................................ 291 2CP104.60-1 ................................................................ 291 2CP200.60-1 ................................................................ 291 2CP210.60-1 ................................................................ 291 2DI400.6 ....................................................................... 306 2DI425.6 ....................................................................... 308 2DI426.6 ....................................................................... 308 2DI725.6 ....................................................................... 309 2DI825.6 ....................................................................... 310 2DO428.6 ..................................................................... 313 2DO430.6 ..................................................................... 313 2DO600.6 ..................................................................... 315 2DO700.6 ..................................................................... 315 2DO710.6 ..................................................................... 317 2DS100.60-1 ................................................................ 294 2DS101.60-1 ................................................................ 297 2EX100.50-1 ................................................................ 286 2EX200.50-1 ................................................................ 286 2EX301.5 ..................................................................... 288 2EX302.5 ..................................................................... 288 2IF100.60-1 .................................................................. 332 2IF101.60-1 .................................................................. 332 2ME910.90-1 ................................................................ 303 2ME913.90-1 ................................................................ 303 2ME915.90-1 ................................................................ 303 2MP100.5 ..................................................................... 300 2NC303.60-1 ................................................................ 336 2NW100.50-1 ............................................................... 334 2PS425.9 ..................................................................... 282 B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001
2PS740.9 ..................................................................... 283 2TB120.9 ..................................................................... 341 2TB140.9 ..................................................................... 341 2UM900.6 .................................................................... 329 3AI350.6 ....................................................................... 209 3AI375.6 ....................................................................... 209 3AI775.6 ....................................................................... 209 3AM050.6 ..................................................................... 213 3AM051.6 ..................................................................... 215 3AM055.6 ..................................................................... 217 3AM374.6 ..................................................................... 219 3AO350.6 ..................................................................... 211 3AO775.6 ..................................................................... 211 3AT350.6 ..................................................................... 222 3AT450.6 ..................................................................... 222 3AT660.6 ..................................................................... 224 3BM150.9 ..................................................................... 258 3BP150.4 ..................................................................... 160 3BP150.41 ................................................................... 160 3BP151.4 ..................................................................... 160 3BP151.41 ................................................................... 160 3BP152.4 ..................................................................... 160 3BP152.41 ................................................................... 160 3BP155.4 ..................................................................... 160 3BP155.41 ................................................................... 160 3CP260.60-1 ................................................................ 175 3DI450.60-9 ................................................................. 189 3DI475.6 ...................................................................... 191 3DI476.6 ...................................................................... 191 3DI477.6 ...................................................................... 193 3DI486.6 ...................................................................... 194 3DI695.6 ...................................................................... 195 3DM455.60-2 ............................................................... 185 3DM476.6 .................................................................... 206 3DO479.6 ..................................................................... 197 3DO480.6 ..................................................................... 197 3DO650.6 ..................................................................... 199 3DO690.6 ..................................................................... 201 3DO750.6 ..................................................................... 199 3DO760.6 ..................................................................... 203 3EX150.60-1 ................................................................ 169 3EX250.60-1 ................................................................ 171 3EX350.6 ..................................................................... 173 3IF050.6 ....................................................................... 227 3IF060.6 ....................................................................... 229 3IF260.60-1 .................................................................. 177 3IF613.9 ....................................................................... 230 3IF621.9 ....................................................................... 231 3IF622.9 ....................................................................... 233 3IF661.9 ....................................................................... 235 3IF671.9 ....................................................................... 236 3IF672.9 ....................................................................... 238 3IF681.95 ..................................................................... 240 3IF681.96 ..................................................................... 242 3IP161.60-1 ................................................................. 179 3NC150.6 ..................................................................... 246 3NC154.60-2 ................................................................ 248 3NC157.60-1 ................................................................ 252 3NW150.60-1 ............................................................... 244 3PS465.9 ..................................................................... 163 3PS477.9 ..................................................................... 163 3PS692.9 ..................................................................... 165 3PS694.9 ..................................................................... 165 3PS792.9 ..................................................................... 167 3PS794.9 ..................................................................... 167 369
Index
3TB162.9 ...................................................................... 259 3TB170:91-02 .............................................................. 260 3TB170.9 ...................................................................... 260 3TB170.91 .................................................................... 260 3TB170:90-02 .............................................................. 260 3XP152.60-2 ................................................................ 182 5LS071.9 ...................................................................... 350 5LS079.9 ...................................................................... 352 5LS251.60-1 ................................................................. 346 7AC010.9 ..................................................................... 141 7AC011.9 ..................................................................... 142 7AC020.9 ..................................................................... 141 7AC911.9 ..................................................................... 360 7AF101.7 ........................................................................ 67 7AI261.7 ....................................................................... 105 7AI294.7 ....................................................................... 107 7AI351.70 ..................................................................... 108 7AI354.70 ..................................................................... 109 7AI774.70 ..................................................................... 110 7AO352.70 ................................................................... 112 7AT324.70 .................................................................... 114 7AT352.70 .................................................................... 116 7AT664.70 .................................................................... 117 7BP701.1 ....................................................................... 46 7BP702.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP702.1 ....................................................................... 46 7BP703.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP704.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP705.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP706.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP707.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP708.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP709.0 ....................................................................... 46 7BP710.0 ....................................................................... 46 7CM211.7 ..................................................................... 120 7CM411.70-1 ............................................................... 123 7CP430.60-1 .................................................................. 56 7CP470.60-2 .................................................................. 56 7CP474.60-1 .................................................................. 56 7CP476.60-1 .................................................................. 60 7CP770.60-1 .................................................................. 56 7CP774.60-1 .................................................................. 56 7DI135.70 ....................................................................... 70 7DI138.70 ....................................................................... 72 7DI140.70 ....................................................................... 74 7DI435.7 ......................................................................... 76 7DI439.7 ......................................................................... 77 7DI439.72 ....................................................................... 79 7DI645.7 ......................................................................... 81 7DM435.7 ....................................................................... 98 7DM438.72 ................................................................... 100 7DM465.7 ..................................................................... 102 7DO135.70 ..................................................................... 83 7DO138.70 ..................................................................... 85 7DO164.70 ..................................................................... 87 7DO435.7 ....................................................................... 89 7DO720.7 ....................................................................... 91 7DO721.7 ....................................................................... 93 7DO722.7 ....................................................................... 95 7EX270.50-1 .................................................................. 49 7EX470.50-1 .................................................................. 50 7EX477.50-2 .................................................................. 52 7EX770.50-1 .................................................................. 50 7EX777.50-1 .................................................................. 52 7IF311.7 ....................................................................... 134 370 7IF321.7 ....................................................................... 135 7IF361.70-1 .................................................................. 136 7IF371.70-1 .................................................................. 137 7ME010.9 ..................................................................... 125 7ME020.9 ..................................................................... 127 7ME770.5 ....................................................................... 64 7MM424.70-1 ............................................................... 129 7MM432.70-1 ............................................................... 131 7NC161.7 ..................................................................... 139 7TB710:91-01 .............................................................. 362 7TB710.9 ..................................................................... 362 7TB710.91 ................................................................... 362 7TB710:90-01 .............................................................. 362 7TB712:91-02 .............................................................. 363 7TB712.9 ..................................................................... 363 7TB712.91 ................................................................... 363 7TB712:90-02 .............................................................. 363 7TB718:91-02 .............................................................. 364 7TB718.9 ..................................................................... 364 7TB718.91 ................................................................... 364 7TB718:90-02 .............................................................. 364 7TB722.9 ..................................................................... 143 7TB722.91 ................................................................... 143 7TB733.9 ..................................................................... 144 7TB733.91 ................................................................... 144 7TB736.9 ..................................................................... 145 7TB736.91 ................................................................... 145 7TB754.9 ..................................................................... 146 7TB754.91 ................................................................... 146 7TB772.91 ................................................................... 147
A
Accessories B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 141 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 255 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 339 Adapter Module B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 65 Analog Input Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 104 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 208 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 319 Analog Interface (AF) Module B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 65 Analog Mixed Modules B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 212 Analog Output Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 111 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 210 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 322
B
B&R SYSTEM 2000 Combination Possibilities ...................................... 25, 26 Local Expansion ......................................................... 19 Modular Construction ................................................. 13 Program Memory Modules ......................................... 18 Remote Expansion ..................................................... 21 Supply Voltage ........................................................... 16 System and I/O Bus .................................................... 14 Terminal Blocks .......................................................... 17 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family ............................... 13
Index
B&R SYSTEM 2003 Environmental Temperature ....................................... 45 Installation ................................................................... 39 Installation Dimensions ............................................... 37 Module Rack ............................................................... 32 Module Slot Rules ....................................................... 43 Modules ...................................................................... 34 Mounting Rail .............................................................. 32 Relative Humidity ........................................................ 45 Terminal Block ............................................................ 42 B&R SYSTEM 2005 Basic Module Construction ....................................... 154 Dimensions ............................................................... 154 Environmental Temperature ..................................... 159 Installation ................................................................. 156 Module Rack ............................................................. 155 Mounting Rail ............................................................ 155 Relative Humidity ...................................................... 159 Terminal Block TB170 .............................................. 158 B&R SYSTEM 2010 Basic Module Construction ....................................... 267 Differences between System and I/O Modules ......... 268 Environmental Temperature ..................................... 274 Installation ................................................................. 270 Module Rack ............................................................. 269 Mounting Rail ............................................................ 270 Relative Humidity ...................................................... 274 Terminal Block TB120 / TB140 ................................. 273 Battery Module ............................................................. 256 Bus Controller Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 48 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 169 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 285 Digital Mixed Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 97 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 205 Digital Output Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 82 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 196 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 312 Dimensions B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 32 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 154 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 267 Documentation B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 147 Drum Sequencer .................................................. 294 , 297
E
ECINT1-1 ..................................................................... 365 ECINT1-11 ................................................................... 365 Encoder Module ........................................................... 139
G
General Accessories .................................................... 355
I
International Standards ................................................ 368
L
Local Expansion ............................................................. 19 Local I/O Master Controller .......................................... 173 Logic Scanner Additional Interfaces ................................................. 344 B&R PLC Operating System .................................... 344 Communication Modules .......................................... 349 Compatibility ............................................................. 344 CPUs ........................................................................ 345 External Power Supply ............................................. 344 General Information .................................................. 344 High Performance ..................................................... 344 Manuals .................................................................... 354 Powerful Visualization .............................................. 344
C
CAN Bus Controller B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 48 Certifications ................................................................ 367 Coding 2010 Terminal Blocks ...................................... 274 Combination Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 119 Communication Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 133 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 226 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 331 Logic Scanner ........................................................... 349 Configuration Memory .................................................... 64 Counter and Positioning Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 138 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 245 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 335 CPUs B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 54 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 174 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 289 Logic Scanner ........................................................... 345
M
Manuals B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 147 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 261 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 342 Logic Scanner ........................................................... 354 MASYS22003-0 ........................................................... 147 MASYS22003-E ........................................................... 147 MASYS22005-0 ........................................................... 261 MASYS22005-E ........................................................... 261 MASYS22010-0 ........................................................... 342 MASYS22010-E ........................................................... 342 MASYS2LS-0 ............................................................... 354 MASYS2LS-E .............................................................. 354 Modular Construction ..................................................... 13 Module Overview B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 27 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 149 371
D
Digital Input Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 68 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 187 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 304
Index
B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 263 Logic Scanner ........................................................... 343 Module Rack B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 46 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 159 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 275 Module Slot Rules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 43 Multiprocessor .............................................................. 300
O
Other Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 119 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 328
P
Positioning Module ...................................... 138, 245, 335 Power Supply Modules B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 161 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 279 PROFIBUS Network Module ................................ 244, 334 Program Memory Modules ............................................. 18 B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 63 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 302 Programmable Modules B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 184 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 293
R
Remote Expansion ......................................................... 21 Remote I/O ..................................................................... 21
S
Screw-in Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 65 Standards ..................................................................... 367 Standards and Certifications ........................................ 367 Supply Voltage ............................................................... 16 System and I/O Bus ....................................................... 14
T
Temperature Modules B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 113 B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 221 B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 324 Terminal Blocks .............................................................. 17
U
Universal Mixed Module ............................................... 329
372
MASYS2KAT-E

ControlSystem E

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ControlSystem E

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Perfection in Automation

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family

Chapter 2 B&R SYSTEM 2003

Chapter 3 B&R SYSTEM 2005

Chapter 4 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Chapter 5 B&R Logic Scanner

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family ........................................................... 13

Chapter 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 ..................................................................................... 27

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................................................... 149

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 4: B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................................................... 263

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 5: B&R Logic Scanner .................................................................................. 343

Chapter 6: Accessories ............................................................................................... 355

Chapter 7: Standards and Certifications ................................................................... 367

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Modular Construction

Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family

Diagram 1: Modular construction of B&R SYSTEM 2003

1.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

Diagram 2: Modular construction of B&R SYSTEM 2005

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family

Diagram 3: Modular construction of B&R SYSTEM 2010

2. System and I/O Bus

Diagram 4: System and I/O Bus B&R SYSTEM 2003

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Diagram 5: System and I/O Bus B&R SYSTEM 2005

2.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Diagram 6: System and I/O Bus B&R SYSTEM 2010

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Supply Voltage

3.2 B&R SYSTEM 2010

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Terminal Blocks

Diagram 7: Terminal blocks B&R SYSTEM 2003

4.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

Diagram 8: Terminal blocks B&R SYSTEM 2005

4.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Diagram 9: Terminal blocks B&R SYSTEM 2010

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Program Memory Modules

5. Program Memory Modules

5.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

5.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Diagram 10: Program memory module B&R SYSTEM 2010

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)

6. Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)

6.2 B&R SYSTEM 2003

6.3 B&R SYSTEM 2005

Diagram 11: B&R SYSTEM 2005 local expansion (expansion I/O)

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Diagram 12: B&R SYSTEM 2010 local expansion (expansion I/O)

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family Remote Expansion (Remote I/O)